B40i Technical Reference Manual Rev C

GE Healthcare
B40i Patient Monitor

Technical Reference Manual

English
2069392-002 C (Paper)
© 2013 General Electric Company.
All Rights Reserved.
Technical Reference Manual
0537
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Order code 2069392-002
Revision C
10 October, 2013
Manufacturer address:
GE Healthcare Finland Oy Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki
Finland
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2013 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Classifications
In accordance with IEC 60601-1
− Class I and internally powered equipment - the type of protection against electric shock.
− Type BF or CF equipment. The degree of protection against electric shock is indicated by a
symbol on each parameter module.
− Equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with
air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
− Continuous operation according to the mode of operation.
− Portable Monitor
In accordance with IEC 60529
− IP21 - degree of protection against harmful ingress of water.
In accordance with EU Medical Device Directive
− IIb.
In accordance with CISPR 11:
− Group 1 Class A;
• Group 1 contains all ISM (Industrial, scientific and medical) equipment in which there
is intentionally generated and/or used conductively coupled radio-frequency energy
which is necessary for the internal functioning of the equipment itself.
• Class A equipment is equipment suitable for use in all establishments other than
domestic and those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply network
which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Trademarks
Listed below are GE Medical Systems Information Technologies and GE Healthcare Finland Oy
trademarks used in this document. All other product and company names contained herein
are the property of their respective owners.
Datex, Ohmeda, DINAMAP, Trim Knob, Unity Network, CARESCAPE, EK-Pro, TruSignal, Entropy,
GE Healthcare, GE Medical system, General Electric Company.
1 Introduction
About this manual 1
1 Overview 3
1.1 Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.2 Safety message signal words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.3 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.2.4 ESD precautionary procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 Service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.1 Service requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.2 Equipment identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2 System description 11
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Bus structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3 Distributed processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4 Module communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.1 Serial communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.5 Parameter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.6 Software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3 Frame functional description 14
3.1 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.1 Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1.3 CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.1.4 Power board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.5 AC/DC unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.1.6 Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.2 Interfacing computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3 Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.1 External connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4 Hemo-dynamic module introduction 23
4.1 Monitor software compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.1 Hemo-dynamic module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.2.2 Signals and isolation barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2.3 Power supply section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.2.4 NIBP board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.5 ECG board in 5-lead measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.6 STP board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3 Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.3.1 Front panel connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4 Measurement principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.4.1 NIBP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.4.2 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.4.3 Pulse oximetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.4.4 Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4.5 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
i
Document no. 2069392-002
4.4.6 Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2 Hardware installation
1 Installation 1
1.1 Unpacking instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Choosing location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Mounting the monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Connection to power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 Check configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.6 Connection to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.6.1 Pre-installation requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6.2 To connect the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.6.3 Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.7 Inserting and removing the E modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.8 Monitor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.9 Visual indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.10 Installation checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 Maintenance
1 Instructions 1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Recommended tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 Electrical Safety Tests 3
2.1 Test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Power Outlet Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Power cord and plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Ground (earth) integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.1 Ground Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.2 Impedance of Protective Earth Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Earth leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Enclosure (Touch) leakage current test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.7 Patient leakage current tests - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.7.1 Patient (source) leakage current test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7.2 Patient (sink) leakage current tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.8 Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3 Installation checkout 13
3.1 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.1 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.3 Time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.4 Parameters measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.5 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.6 MC or S/5 Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.7 Conclusion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4 Maintenance and checkout 16
ii
4.2 Functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.1 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Keyboard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.4 Time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.5 Hemo Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.6 Loudspeaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.7 Monitor software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.8 Watchdog circuitry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.9 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.2.10 Final cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3 Monitor battery maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.1 Use recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.2 Storage recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.3 Test the battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.4 Charge the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.3.5 Condition the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.3.6 Replace the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5 Adjustments and calibrations 24
5.1 NIBP calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2 Temperature calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3 Invasive pressure calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4 Troubleshooting
1 Introduction 1
1.1 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Software troubleshooting chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Frame troubleshooting 4
2.1 Battery indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 NET section troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Hemo Troubleshooting 9
3.1 NIBP troubleshooting flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 ECG troubleshooting flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3 STP troubleshooting flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4 NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4.1 NIBP toubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4.2 NIBP error code explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.5 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.6 Impedance respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.7 Pulse oximetry (SpO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.8 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.9 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5 Service Menu
iii
1 Introduction 1
1.1 Service Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 SW Management 3
2.1 SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Active Inactive SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3 NIBP SW Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4 Country Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 License. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Enter/Exit Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Frame 6
3.1 Country Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.1 Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2.1 Network Config (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2.2 TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.2.3 HL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2.4 Dri Config (S/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2.5 Dri Comm (in S/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3.1 Power page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.3.2 WPM Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4 Keyboard 20
4.1 Keyboard Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5 Parameters 22
5.1 Gas Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.1.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.1.2 Gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2 ECG Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.2.1 ECG Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.3 STP Module (for GE SpO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.3.1 Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.4 NIBP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.4.1 NIBP Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.4.2 NIBP Safety Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.4.3 NIBP Pneumatics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.5 SpO2 (for Masimo/Nellcor SpO2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.6 Entropy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6 Set/Test 36
7 Service Log 37
6 Field replaceable unit

1 Spare part 1
1.1 Front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Back cover unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.4 Extension rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
iv
1.5 Hemo box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.6 FRU parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.7 Other parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 Disassembly 6
2.1 ESD precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 Reassembly precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5 To separate the frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.6 To disassemble the frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7 To disassemble the extended rack and the recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.8 Handling and storage of display component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.9 To replace the fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.10 To download the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
7 Technical specification
1 General Specifications 1
1.1 Genenral specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Defibrillator synchronization connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Parameters specifications 4
2.1 ECG specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Impedance respiration specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 GE TruSignal SpO2 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Nellcor SpO2 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.5 Masimo SpO2 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.6 NIBP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.8 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.9 Airway gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.10 Entropy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
8 E-miniC Module
1 Product overview 1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Measurement principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.1 CO2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3.1 Gas sampling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.2 MiniC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3.3 CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.4 Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Replacement of planned maintenance parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.1 Required parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.2 Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2 Visual inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
v
2.3 Functional checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.3.1 Test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3.3 Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3 Calibration and adjustments 13
3.1 Sample flow rate adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.1 Calibration setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1.2 Sample flow rate adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Gas calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4 Troubleshooting 16
4.2 Troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.1 Gas sampling system troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.2 MiniC sensor troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.3 Troubleshooting charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5 Disassembly and reassembly 19
5.1 Disassembly guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1.1 Serviceable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1.2 Service limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1.3 ESD precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1.4 Before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.1.5 Tools needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2 Disassembly and reassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.2.1 Replacing the pump unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.2.2 Replacing the miniCO2 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6 Service parts 22
6.1 Ordering parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.2 Spare parts for E-miniC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
9 E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO Modules

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.1 CO2, N2O, and agent measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.2 O2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.1 Controls and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.2 Gas sampling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3.3 MiniTPX measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.4 MiniOM Oxygen sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3.5 CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.6 MiniOM board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.7 Main Component Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1 Replacement of planned maintenance parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.1.1 Required parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
vi
2.1.2 Planned Maintenance Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.1.3 Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2 Visual inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.1 Test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3.3 Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3 Calibration and adjustments 21
3.1 Sample Flow Rate Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.1.2 Sample Flow Rate Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2 Gas Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4 Troubleshooting 24
4.2 Troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.1 Gas sampling system troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.2 MiniOM Measuring unit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.3 MiniTPX Measuring unit troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.4 CPU board troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.3 Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.4.1 Gas measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.5 Troubleshooting charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.5.1 Gas measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5.1.1 Serviceable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1.2 Service limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1.3 ESD precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.1.4 Protection from dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.1.6 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.2 Disassembly and reassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.2.1 Disassembly workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.2.2 Detaching the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.2.3 Detaching the Module Casing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.2.4 Replacement of Planned Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.2.5 Replacement of CO2 Absorber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.2.6 Detaching the Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.2.7 Detaching the Front Chassis Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2.8 Detaching the Main Flow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2.9 Detaching the Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.2.10 Detaching the OM holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6 Service parts 39
6.1 Ordering parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.1.1 Planned Maintenance Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.2 Spare parts for E-sCAiO, E-sCO, N-CAiO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.2.1 Front covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
vii
10 E-Entropy Module
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2.1 EntrEEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.2 FEMG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.3 RE and SE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.4 Impedance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.1 Controls and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3.2 Entropy board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Visual inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Electrical safety tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3.1 Test setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3.2 Entropy tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3.3 Test completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Troubleshooting 8
3.1 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 Troubleshooting chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1.1 ESD precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.1.3 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2 Disassembling and reassembling procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2.1 To replace the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2.2 To replace the Entropy board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2.3 Reassembling the module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5 Service parts 12
5.1 Ordering parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.2 Spare parts for E-ENTROPY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Appendix A: Software download instruction A-1

Appendix B: ElectroMagnetic Compatibility B-1
Appendix C: Installation and checkout form, B40i C-1
Appendix D: Maintenance and checkout form, B40i D-1
Appendix E: Service check form, E-miniC E-1
Appendix F: Service check form, E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO F-1
Appendix G: Service check form, E-Entropy G-1
Appendix H: Networking disclosure to facilitate network risk managment H-1
viii
1 Introduction
About this manual
Intended purpose of this device (Indications for use)

This device is a portable multi-parameter unit to be used for monitoring and recording of, and
to generate alarms for, multiple physiological parameters of adult, pediatric, and neonatal
patients in a hospital environment and during intra-hospital transport.
The B40i Patient Monitor is intended for use under the direct supervision of a licensed health
care practitioner.
The B40i Patient Monitor is not intended for use during MRI.
The B40i Patient Monitor can be a stand-alone monitor or interfaced to other devices via a
network.
The B40i Patient Monitor monitors and displays: ECG (including ST segment, arrhythmia
detection), invasive blood pressure, heart/pulse rate, oscillometric non-invasive blood pressure
(systolic, diastolic and mean arterial pressure), functional oxygen saturation (SpO2) and pulse
rate via continuous monitoring( including monitoring during conditions of clinical patient
motion or low perfusion), temperature with a reusable or disposable electronic thermometer
for continual monitoring
Esophageal/Nasopharyngeal/Tympanic/Rectal/Bladder/Axillary/Skin/Airway/Room/Myocardia
l/Core/Surface temperature, impedance respiration, respiration rate, airway gases (CO2, O2,
N2O, anesthetic agents, anesthetic agent identification and respiratory rate), and Entropy.
Intended audience
This Technical reference manual is meant for service representatives and technical personnel
who install, configure, maintain, administer, troubleshoot or repair B40i monitor running the
software license VSP-B.
Notes to the reader

As the monitor setup may vary, some functions described may not be available in the monitor
you are using.
• The order code for the manual is 2069392-002.
• Read the manual through and make sure that you understand the procedures described
before the installation of the monitor. To avoid risks concerning safety or health, strictly
observe the warning indications. If you need any assistance concerning the installation,
please do not hesitate to contact your authorized distributor.
Installation without network are allowed by customer. The network installation and service are
allowed by authorized service personnel only.
GE Healthcare assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software in equipment
that is not furnished by GE.
Responsibility of the manufacturer

GE Healthcare Finland Oy (GE) is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and
performance of the equipment only if:
− Assembly operations, extensions, readjustments, modifications, or repairs are carried out
by persons authorized by GE.
1-1

− The electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the requirements of the
appropriate regulations.
− The equipment is used in accordance with the “User's Guide.”
− The equipment is installed, maintained and serviced in accordance with this manual.
Product availability
Some of the product parts and accessories mentioned in this manual may not be available in
all countries.
Please, consult your local representative for the availability.
Related documentation
− Clinical aspects, basic methods of measurement and technical background: Patient
Monitor B40i User’s Reference Manual
− Options and selections of the software: Patient Monitor B40i Default Configuration
Worksheet
− Compatible supplies and accessories: Patient Monitor B40i Supplies and Accessories
− Other devices closely related to the monitor:
• iCentral and iCentral Client User's Reference Manual
• CIC Pro Clinical Information Center Operator's Manual
Conventions used
To help you find and interpret information easily, the manual uses consistent text formats:
 Sign the check form after performing the procedure.
Within this manual, special styles and formats are used to distinguish between terms viewed
on screen, a button you must press, or a list of menu commands you must select:
− Names of hardware keys on the keypad are written in bold typeface: NIBP
Start/Cancel.
− Menu items are written in bold italic typeface: Monitor Setup.
− Emphasized text is in italic typeface.
− When referring to different sections in this manual, section names are enclosed in double
quotes: “Cleaning and care”.
− The word “select” means choosing and confirming.
− Messages (alarm messages, informative messages) displayed on the screen are written
inside single quotes: 'Learning.'
− Note statements provide application tips or other useful information.
Illustrations and names

All illustrations in this manual are only examples, and may not necessarily reflect your system
settings or data displayed in your system. If a particular selection is not available in your
system, the selection is shown grayed.
1-2

Overview
1 Overview
The B40i is a modular multiparameter patient monitor. The monitor is especially designed for
monitoring in intensive care units. It can also be used during transportation within the hospital.
The modular design makes the system flexible and easy to upgrade.
NOTE: Your system may not include all these components. Consult your local representative for
the available components.
2
1, 4
1. B40i monitor frame

2. E modules: The compatible acquisition modules
3. Extension rack
4. Software: VSP-B
1-3

1.1 Symbols
- On the rear panel:
- Electric shock hazard. Do not open the cover or the back.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
- For continued protection against fire hazard, replace the fuse
only with one of the same type and rating.
- Disconnect from the power supply before servicing.
- Do not use the monitor without manufacturer approved
mounting attached.
- On the hemo module: Protection against cardiac defibrillator
discharge is due in part to the accessories for pulse oximetry
(SpO2), temperature (T) and invasive pressure (P) measurement
Follow operating instructions
Refer to instruction manual/booklet
Electrostatic sensitive device. Connections should not be made to

this device unless ESD precautionary procedures are followed.
Type BF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated

(floating) applied part suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac application.
Type BF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric

shock. Isolated (floating) applied part suitable for intentional
external and internal application to the patient, excluding direct
cardiac application.
Type CF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated
(floating) applied part suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient, including direct cardiac application.
Type CF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric
shock. Isolated (floating) applied part suitable for intentional
external and internal application to the patient including direct
cardiac application.
In the front panel: battery
Equipotentiality. Monitor can be connected to potential equalization

conductor.
Alternating current
1-4

Overview
Audio pause.
Home. Return to the normal screen.
ON/OFF.
Fuse. Replace the fuse only with one of the same type and rating
Gas inlet.
Gas outlet.
IP21 Degree of ingress protection.

SN,S/N Serial number
Date of manufacture. This symbol indicates the date of
manufacture of this device. The four digits identify the year.
Manufacturer. This symbol indicates the name and the address of

the manufacturer.
European Union Declaration of Conformity.
Prescriptive Device. USA only. For use by or on the order of a

Rx Only U.S.
Physician or persons licensed by state law.
Fragile. Handle with care.
Keep dry. Protect from rain.
This way up.
Storage temperature
Humidity limitations.
Atmospheric pressure limitations.
1-5

Recycled materials or may be recycled.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic

equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and
must be collected separately. Please, contact an authorized
representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.
The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its

packaging, to advise you that the battery must be recycled or
disposed of in accordance with local or country laws. To minimize
potential effects on the environment and human health, it is
important that all marked batteries that you remove from the
product are properly recycled or disposed. For information on how
the battery may be safely removed from the device, please consult
the service manual or equipment instructions. Information on the
potential effects on the environment and human health of the
substances used in batteries is available at this url:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/euen/weee-recycling/index.html
Battery operation and remaining capacity. The height of the green
A
B B bar indicates the charging level.
Battery (A) charging (white bar)
Battery (A) failure

B
Both batteries failed
Battery (A) missing
Submenu. Selecting a menu item with this symbol opens a new

menu.
The monitor is connected to Network.
A blinking heart next to the heart rate or pulse rate value indicates
the beats detected.
A lung next to the respiration rate value indicates that respiration

rate is calculated from the impedance respiration measurement.
1-6

Overview
Alarm off indicator - Displays in the digit field and in the Alarms
Setup menu when physiological alarms for this parameter are
turned off.
Audio alarms off indicator - Displays in the upper left corner of the
alarm area when physiological audible alarms are turned off.
Audio alarms paused indicator - Indicates all audio alarms are

paused and the amount of time remaining for the alarm pause
period displays as a countdown timer. Displays in the upper left
corner of the screen.
1.2 Safety information

1.2.1 General
This device is intended for use under the direct supervision of a licensed health care
practitioner.
Contact GE for information before connecting any devices to the equipment that are not
recommended in this manual.
Parts and accessories used must meet the requirements of the applicable IEC 60601 series
safety standards, and/or the system configuration must meet the requirements of the IEC
60601-1-1 medical electrical systems standard.
Periodically, and whenever the integrity of the device is in doubt, test all functions.
The use of ACCESSORY equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of
this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration
relating to the choice shall include:
• use of the accessory in the PATIENT VICINITY; and
• evidence that the safety certification of the ACCESSORY has been performed in
accordance to the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and/or IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
If the installation of the equipment, in the USA, will use 240V rather than 120V, the source must
be a center-tapped, 240V, single-phase circuit.
1.2.2 Safety message signal words

Safety message signal words designate the severity of a potential hazard.
DANGER: Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death orserious
injury. No danger messages apply to this system.
WARNING: Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death orserious
injury.
CAUTION: Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
NOTE: Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury that, if not avoided, could
result in property damage.
1-7

1.2.3 Safety precautions

The following list contains general warnings and cautions you should know before installing,
maintaining or servicing the system. Warnings and cautions specific to the use of the system
can be found in the User’s Guide and User’s Reference Manual.
Warnings
• Use only GE recommended power cords.
• When disconnecting the system from the power line, remove the plug from the wall outlet
first.
• Due to high voltage, use insulated screw driver.
• High voltage on test body; do not touch it during the test.
• To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply
mains with protective earth.
• Always check that power cord and plug are intact and undamaged.
• All system devices must be connected to the same power supply circuit.
• Only interconnect devices when determined safe by qualified biomedical personnel.
• Only devices that are specified compliant with IEC 60950-1 or IEC 60601-1 may be
connected to the Ethernet MC ports.
• Biomed must determine interconnected parts are safe.
• Do not use without manufacturer approved mounting.
• If the software package is changed, all clinical settings will reset to factory defaults.
• Do not use with iCentral software V5.0.3 and earlier.
• Do not use Mobile Care Server software V5.2 and earlier.
• Verify compatibility of all system components prior to installation.
• Use only approved accessories, including mounts, and defibrillator-proof cables and
invasive pressure transducers. For a list of approved accessories, see the supplies and
accessories list delivered with the monitor. Other cables, transducers and accessories
may cause a safety hazard, damage the equipment or system, result in increased
emissions or decreased immunity of the equipment or system or interfere with the
measurement.
• Regular preventive maintenance should be carried out annually.
• Do not use multiple modules with identical measurements in the same monitor.
• The user may only perform maintenance procedures specifically described in this
manual.
• Incorrect power line frequency setting could adversely affect ECG processing.
• Make sure patient is not being monitored while servicing the equipment.
• Don’t press power key when changing language or doing factory reset.
• Never store the monitor with the batteries inside. Storing the monitor with the batteries
inside may result in damage to the monitor.
1-8

Overview
Cautions
• Set the time of a newly added network device as close as possible to the time of devices
already on the network.
1.2.4 ESD precautionary procedures

• To avoid electrostatic charges building up, it is recommended to store, maintain and use
the equipment at a relative humidity of 30% or greater. Floors should be covered by ESD
dissipative carpets or similar. Non-synthetic clothing should be used when working with
the component.
• To prevent applying a possible electrostatic discharge to the ESD sensitive parts of the
equipment, one should touch the metallic frame of the component or a large metal object
located close to the equipment. When working with the equipment and specifically when
the ESD sensitive parts of the equipment may be touched, a grounded wrist strap
intended for use with ESD sensitive equipment should be worn. Refer to the
documentation provided with the wrist straps for details of proper use.
ESD precautionary procedure training

It is recommended that all potential users receive an explanation of the ESD warning symbol
and training in ESD precautionary procedures.
The minimum contents of an ESD precautionary procedure training should include an
introduction to the physics of electrostatic charge, the voltage levels that can occur in normal
practice and the damage that can be done to electronic components if they are touched by an
operator who is electrostatically charged. Further, an explanation should be given of methods
to prevent build-up of electrostatic charge and how and why to discharge one’s body to earth
or to the frame of the equipment or bond oneself by means of a wrist strap to the equipment or
the earth prior to making a connection.
1.2.5 Disposal
Dispose of the whole device, parts of it and its packing material and manuals in accordance
with local environmental and waste disposal regulations.
1.3 Service information

1.3.1 Service requirements
Follow the service requirements listed below.
• Refer equipment servicing to GE authorized service personnel only.
• Any unauthorized attempt to repair equipment under warranty voids that warranty.
• It is the user's responsibility to report the need for service to GE or to one of their
authorized agents.
• Failure on the part of the responsible individual, hospital, or institution using this
equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue
equipment failure and possible health hazards.
• Regular maintenance, irrespective of usage, is essential to ensure that the equipment will
always be functional when required.
1-9

1.3.2 Equipment identification

Every GE device has a unique serial number for identification. The device plate is located on the
rear of the patient monitor.
Serial number for B40i: SK3YYFW0000HA
1-10

System description
2 System description
2.1 Introduction
The B40i monitor build up a freely configurable modular system. The architecture is designed
to enable different module combinations so that the user is able to get the desirable parameter
and feature set. This modular approach makes it possible to add new features when they are
needed.
2.2 Bus structure

The operation of monitor is based on two communication channels, the CPU bus and module
bus. All units, including the modules, receive power from the same power supply, which is an
integral part of the monitor frame.
NAND
Ethernet
Flash
DATA BUS
AT91SA
USB HOSE RS485
M7s256
SDRAM
AT91 ARM IIC BUS Sound
Address bus
LCD LCD DATA BUS
Figure 1 General bus structure of monitor

The CPU bus is a communication channel used only for internal data transfer. It is based on the
AT91 ARM local bus. Data and address are transferred on this 32 bit wide bus using the CPU
clock frequency.
The module bus is for the parameter modules. The bus is based on the industry standard
RS-485, which uses a differential serial method to transfer data. The module bus uses a 500
kbps data transfer rate.
The RS-485 type of serial communication supports so-called multidrop or party line
connections. This means that all parameter modules connected to the module bus use exactly
the same lines for communication. The advantage of this is that all bus connectors are
identical and the modules can be connected in any order and position.
1-11

2.3 Distributed processing

This is a multiprocessor system. All parameter modules have their own microprocessor, which
performs functions such as waveform filtering, parameter related computing and pneumatic
control, etc. At the same time the main CPU performs higher level tasks such as trending and
alarm control. While the parameter modules and CPU are performing their tasks, the UPI
(Universal Peripheral Interface) microprocessor handles all functions needed to transfer data
between the parameter modules and the CPU.
This kind of parallel processing gives one major advantage to centralized processing. When
new parameter modules are added to the system, the processing power is increased. As a
result, the system does not slow down when new features are added.
2.4 Module communication

The communication master controlling data transfers between the CPU and parameter
modules is called UPI processor. It sends data to each connected module 100 times a second.
Modules respond to each data request immediately by sending a data package, whose length
depends on the type of the module. This communication protocol ensures that each module
receives and sends data every 10 ms. If a module does not respond to data requests, the UPI
processor presumes that the module is disconnected.
The data transfered on USB bus between main CPU and UPI processor.
Marker Out
Main CPU USB BUS UPI Processor Module BUS
Figure 2 Principle of UPI section operation
2.4.1 Serial communication

An RS485 type bus driver makes the serial communication between the module and the frame.
The data transmission rate is 500kbps.
Module Bus (RS-485)
Frame
Hemo
Recorder E-module
module
Figure 3 Serial communication between Frame and modules
1-12

System description
2.5 Parameter modules
+5V +13...16V
Isolation VMOD
Analog transformer
electronics
MODULE BUS
Patient isolation
A/D
PATIENT
CPU
convert
Data
RAM
EEPROM
Peripheral RS485
drivers Opto isolation
drivers
Figure 4 General structure of parameter modules with patient isolation

The detailed structure of a parameter module depends on the specific needs for each
individual parameter. However, some common parts are used in the parameter modules. The
electronics inside the module is usually divided into isolated (floating) and non-isolated
sections. Typically, the non-isolated section consists of buffers to interface the parameter
module to the module bus while the rest of the electronics is located in the isolated section. The
isolated section includes the microcontroller together with memory components, the front-end
analog electronics (amplifiers, etc.) and sensor drivers.
2.6 Software loading

The program memory on the CPU board is loaded with monitor software and selected
language files at the factory. The software is used for running all the functions that are
integrated into the CPU board. For service upgrade main software and language files, please
refer to "Software download instruction" in Appendix A or the “B40i Patient Monitor Software
download instruction”.
How to do cold start?

The patient monitor performs a cold start, if there is over 15 minutes from the previous power
off. You can perform a cold start by 2 methods:
• Press ON/OFF button to turn off the monitor, waiting for 15 minutes to turn on the
monitor. Or,
• Press ON/OFF button for about 15 seconds (until the words “monitor is shutting
downing...“ disappear) to turn off the monitor. Then turn on the monitor.
NOTE: All the patient data and monitor settings will be lost after cold start.
1-13

3 Frame functional description

3.1 Main components
3.1.1 Keyboards
Admit/ Monitor Print/ Airway NIBP Auto Recorder

Discharge Setup
ECG NIBP On/Off Start/Stop
Record Gas
Pt.Data & Alarms Take NIBP IBP

SpO2 IBP NIBP Start/Cancel Zero All
Trends Setup Snapshot
User interface parts

The Horizontal Membrane keypad containing 19 keys. The keypads are foil membrane
keypads. The keypads are connected to the UPI section of the CPU board.
Trim Knob is used for menu selection.
3.1.2 Display
The B40i use 12.1” LED backlight display with SVGA 800 x 600 resolution has bright long life
light bar and a wide viewing angle.
Backlights
The backlight of LCD is made up of 1 light bar, LED to be 3020, 20 pieces, 10 serials and 2
parallels. The backlight unit is driven by a separate driver board.
1-14

Frame functional description
I/O connector
AC INLET Cable or wires
100-240 Vac
50/60 Hz Pin-to-pin connection
Alarm light
Speaker
board
AC/DC
Unit
LCD
display
SVGA
Nurse call LED
Serial data CPU driver
Power Board XY/CW Board board
Module bus
Module bus Module bus

Vmod Module connector
interface board Module bus
connector
Network
CW
Trim Knob
Battery board User interface
board XY Keyboard/Memb Power
External interface rane switch indicator
board
SMBUS
SMBUS
BAT1
BAT2
Network Multi I/O

Smart Smart
battery A battery B Multi I/O
Li-ion Li-ion adaptor
9-12.6V 9-12.6V
Nurse DFB Serial
call MK out port
Figure 5 B40i Monitor block diagram
1-15

3.1.3 CPU board
The board is based on AT91 ARM microprocessor. Other functions include LVDS display driver,
10/100Mbps on board Ethernet, WLAN communication, Alarm Light function, KEY board and
rotor encoder control, audio driver function, nurse call function, defibrillation function, module
bus function.
The CPU section takes care of the central processing.
The main features are:
• AT91 ARM
• 266 MHz Main CPU clock
• 64MBytes SDRAM
• 128 MBytes minimum NAND flash memory
• 4 MBytes Data flash memory
• Main CPU Provides one standard UART communication
Connectors
Ethernet communication connector
WLAN card operation connector
Color LED baclight display operation connector
Audio operation connector
Alarm Light indicator operation connector
Power board connection connector
Voltage supervision
There are two voltage supervision chips that control the system reset signals.
The +3.3V supervision chip outputs reset signals for +3.3V devices. 3.3V Reset Threshold will be
Falling: min 3.00 V; max 3.15 V.
1-16

The +1.2V supervision chip outputs reset signals for +1.2V devices. 1.2V Reset Threshold will be
Falling: min 1.08V; max 1.14 V.
3.1.4 Power board

The Power board converts the output voltage of AC/DC unit and battery voltage to various
supply voltages for the electronics of monitor. The Power board provides monitor system
power function, module bus power function, display backlight power and power failure alarm.
Power board operation is controlled by PMC (Power Management Controller) CPU. PMC takes
care of power path controlling. Power Board incorporates the SMBus interface between the
PMC, battery charger IC, and smart battery.
Power board provides the system voltage for +3.3V, +5V. And Power Board provides 15V power
for measurement modules connected patient monitor module bus.
The Boost converter of PMC system provides module voltage supply for measurement modules
through patient monitor module bus.It operates at input voltage from 9V to15V.
Power Board create an power failure alarm for user to notice unexpected loss of power supply.
It indicate power failure alarm by blinking patient monitor yellow alarm light and buzzer alarm.
Block diagram of the power supplies is represented in following
1-17

MUX
+5V_PMC
ACDC (15V) Battery Charger
Battery 1 Power Path Power Management Controller (PMC)
Battery 2
Over Voltage
VSYS Enable
Protection Power Fail Alarm
Switch (Crowbar)
3.3V & 5V Buck +3.3V

VSYS
Regulator +5V
Over Current
15V Boost
Protection & Current VMOD
Regulator
Sense
+5V_PMC Linear +5V_PMC

Regulator
LCD Backlight
Backlight_VCC
Enable Switch
Figure 6 Power board block diagram
Power management controller

The power management controller (PMC) used is the Freescale MC9508AC60CFUE, 8 bit
microcontroller. The PMC is used to:
− Control power supplies sequencing
− Monitor the power supply voltages and currents via internal analog to digital converters
(ADCs)
− Disabling power supplies during fault conditions
− Communicate with the CPU board via UART communication
− Read and write to a IIC EEPROM
− Communicate with smart batteries and a level 2 smart battery charger via SMBus.
1-18

3.1.5 AC/DC unit
AC/DC unit
The AC/DC unit is a compact medical power supply based on high-efficiency technology. It is
designed for 65 watt continuous output power, universal AC input and 15V output voltage.
3.1.6 Batteries
The B40i has two lithium-ion batteries, located in the battery compartment. The power board
connects one of the batteries to be the power source, if no power is received from the AC/DC
unit.The battery charging is controlled by the power board.
The batteries can be charged separately, and screen symbols and monitor frame LED
indicators indicate their charging level and possible failure.
NOTE: When the monitor is battery powered, the green battery LED is on. When the monitor is
mains powered, the green mains LED is on.
3.2 Interfacing computer

A computer is connected to the serial port connector on the Multi I/O adapter.
Contact your authorized GE Healthcare distributor for further advice on computer interface.
WARNING Connecting electrical equipment together or using the same extension cord
for more than one device may cause their leakage currents to exceed the
limits specified in relevant safety standards. Always make sure that the
combination complies with the international safety standard IEC 60601-1-1
for medical electrical systems and with the requirements of local
authorities.
WARNING Connecting the power supply cord of the computer to the wall power outlet
may cause the computer leakage current to exceed the limit specified for
medical equipment. A computer must be supplied from an additional
transformer providing at least basic isolation (isolating or separating
transformer).
1-19

3.3 Connectors and signals

3.3.1 External connectors
Figure 7 External connectors of Frame

(1) Receptacle for power cord
(2) Serial port
(3) Defibrillator connector
(4) Nurse call connector
(5) Network connector
(6) Equipotential connector
(7) Multi I/O connector
NOTE: 2,3,4 is on the multi I/O adpter.
Network connector
RJ45 connector Pin Signal
1 Tx +
2 Tx -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 Rx +
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 Rx -
7 N/C
8 N/C
1-20

Multi I/O connector(26 pin)

26 pin female connector Pin Signal
1 GND
2 NC
3 NC
18 10 4 NC
26 19 5 NC
6 NC
7 SERIAL_TXD
8 SERIAL _CTS#
9 GND
10 GND
11 NC
12 NC
13 DEFIB_MARKER_OUT
14 NC
15 NC
16 SERIAL_RXD
17 SERIAL_RTS#
18 GND
19 GND
20 NURSE_CALL
21 NC
22 NC
23 NC
24 NC
25 SERIAL_+3V3
26 GND
Nurse Call (pin 3)

Nurse call connector Pin Signal
1 GND
2 Nurse_Call
3 Nurse_Call
Recommended cable design:
Pin 1
Pin 2,3
1-21

Serial port
9 pin female connector Pin Signal
1 GND
2 SERIAL_TXD
5 1 3 SERIAL_RXD
4 SERIAL+3.3V
6
9
5 GND
6 N/C
7 SERIAL_CTS
8 SERIAL_RTS
9 N/C
Main power
Mains connector Pin Signal
L Live
PE Protected earth
N Neutral
Defib connector (Pin 7)

Female mini din7 connector Pin Signal
1 GND
2 GND
3 GND
4 GND
5 DEFIB_MARKER_OUT
6 NC
7 GND
1-22

Hemo-dynamic module introduction
4 Hemo-dynamic module introduction

The hemo module provide general hemodynamic parameters.
Figure 8 Hemo module
4.1 Monitor software compatibility

− B40i Patient Monitor using software VSP-B
4.2 Main components

4.2.1 Hemo-dynamic module
1 1. InvBP connector
2
2. Temperature connector
3. SpO2 connector
4. ECG connector
3
5. NIBP connector
4
Figure 9 Front panel of hemo module

The Hemo-dynamic module including the NIBP measurement, 5-lead ECG with the Impedance
Respiration measurement, SpO2 with the plethysmographic waveform, two invasive pressure
measurements (IBP1 and IBP2) and two temperature measurements (T1 and T2).
1-23

The monitor displays waveforms and measurement readings, and handles the trending and
alarm management. The ECG (e.g. heart beat and arrhythmia detection) and the Impedance
Respiration algorithms are in the monitor software. The modules measure signals and send
them to the monitor. The NIBP, SpO2, Temperature and Invasive Pressure algorithms are in the
module.
There are four parameter circuit boards inside the hemo-dynamic module for processing the
measurement signals. Each processing board has a microcontroller with software.
The NIBP parameter measurement requires one signal processing board, pneumatic system,
valve and pump unit connected to NIBP parameter board.
The second parameter board is the optional board, for Nellcor or Masimo SpO2 measurement,
it’s Masimo MS-2011 board or Covidien NELL1GE-S board at different configuration.
The third parameter board is for GE SpO2, IBP and Temperature measurement including input
board. All these three parameter is optional, according to different configuration, using
different board: it’s STP board, TP board for Nellcor, TP board for Masimo, GE SpO2 board.
The fourth parameter board is for 3/5-lead ECG with the Impedance Respiration measurement
including ECG input unit connected to the ECG parameter board.
All parameter boards are connected together via module bus flex board connecting voltage
and module communication, the module communicates with frame through RS-485 bus.
4.2.2 Signals and isolation barrier

The communication signals transfer over the isolation barrier by using high isolation voltage
(6kV) opto isolators.
4.2.3 Power supply section

The power for the electronics on the floating part of the STP and the ECG boards is made on
each board with the switching power supplies connected to a high voltage isolated
transformer. The switching power supplies on the STP and ECG boards are synchronized to the
frequency, about 172.8 kHz of the switching power supply on the NIBP board. The NIBP board
supplies non-isolated 5 V to the ECG and STP boards. The module uses only Vmod 15V +/- 3%
of the frame. The other voltages of the measuring boards are made by the switching power
supplies and regulators or the linear regulators. Each measuring board is protected against
overloading with PTC type automatic fuses.
1-24

4.2.4 NIBP board
Valves
connector
EEPROM
1024Bytes
connector
Pump
Main CPU Pneumatic
AT91SAM7S256 control
RS485
Module bus connector
interface
256KBytes Flash
64KBytes SRAM
10bits ADC
PWR_ NIBP_+5V Pressure

SYN
6VD sensor
Power supply
MAIN_REF
Safety CPU
MSP430F2013
2KB+256B Flash
128B RAM
16bits Sigma-
Delta ADC
Figure 10 NIBP board functional block diagram
Signal processing
Two signals from the pressure transducers are amplified and sent to the A/D converter. After
the converter, digitized signals are sent to the microprocessor for data processing.
The NIBP board is controlled with an ARM7 microprocessor at 16 MHz oscillator frequency.
Memory
The NIBP program memory (processor flash memory) size is 256k x 8. The processor has 64
kBytes RAM. The EEPROM size is 8K x 8 and it is used to store the calibration values for the
pressure transducers, the pulse valve constants gained during measurements, the PC board
identification, and the module serial number.
Software control
The software controls valves and a pump. In addition to the individual on/off signals for each
component there is a common power switch for the valves and the pump that can be used at
pump/valve failures.
Safety circuit
The NIBP board is equipped with an independent safety circuit to disconnect supply voltages
from the pump and the valves if the cuff has been pressurized longer than the preset
maximum measurement time, or if the pressure of the cuff is inflated over the specified
pressure limit. The maximum measurement time values and pressure limits for different
measurement modes have been specified in the technical specification section of this manual.
1-25

Pneumatics
1
5, 6
3
4 1
The module has the following pneumatics parts:

5. Intake air filter; for preventing dust and other parts from entering the air pump and the
valves.
6. Air pump; for pumping the measuring pressure of the cuff.
7. Deflation Valve; for producing a linear pressure fall (bleeding) in order to measure the
blood pressure of the patient.
8. Safety valve/Dump valve; The Safety valve/Dump valve is intended to be used for
deflating the cuff in single fault case, i.e. to prevent too long a measurement time or too
high an inflation pressure of the cuff.
9. Main pressure sensor; for measuring the pressure of the blood pressure cuff and the
pressure fluctuations caused by arterial wall movement.
10. Second pressure sensor; for detecting the, cuff loose, cuff occlusion situations, etc. and
for recognizing the pressure sensor fault.
11. Cuff connector; for connection and hose identification.
Power supply section of the NIBP board

All connections are established via a 10-pin connector (male). The module needs a +15 V (dirty)
power supply to operate. The supply voltage Vmod 15V +/- 3% is generated in the power
supply section of the monitor. The other voltages needed for the operation of the NIBP
measurement are made on the NIBP board.
The NIBP power supply synchronizes the ECG and STP isolation power and supplies
non-isolated 5 V to the ECG and STP board.
1-26

4.2.5 ECG board in 5-lead measurement

The ECG measurement consists of the functions shown in Figure 11. All functions are located in
the ECG board except the ECG input unit.
PATIENT AND ECG ELECTRODES
ECG CABLE
- ECG LEAD SET
- ECG TRUNK CABLE
ECG INPUT UNIT

- ECG CONNECTOR
- INPUT PROTECTION RESISTORS
INPUT PROTECTION DIODES FOR ECG & RESPIRATION MEASUREMENT
INPUT FILTERING FOR ECG & RESPIRATION MEASUREMENTS
LEADS OFF &

RESPIRATION RESPIRATION ECG
PACER &
MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT PREAMPLIFIERS &
DEFIBRILLATION
AMPLIFIERS CURRENT SUPPLY RLD CIRCUIT
DETECTION
BASELINE
RESTORATION
ECG CPU
12_lead_ECG_meas_blck_dgrm.vsd
RS 485 POWER SUPPLY
COMMUNICATION NV
MEMORY
ISOLATION ISOLATION
MODULE BUS CONNECTOR ECG BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 11 ECG measurement block diagram
ECG input unit

The ECG input unit consists of the front panel connector and the ECG input connector board
with the high voltage protection resistors. The connector for the ECG cable is a green 11-pin
rectangle shaped connector.
Input protection and filtering

The input protection is implemented with high voltage protection resistors in the ECG input unit
and with protection diodes in the ECG board. The input filtering for ECG measurement is done
with passive RC filtering.
ECG preamplifiers
The buffer amplifiers are used for each lead. The “Leads off” detection is implemented by
measuring the output level of the input buffer amplifiers with the A/D converter of the CPU. The
ECG signals are measured using differential amplifiers.
1-27

ECG amplifiers and baseline restoration

The function of the ECG amplifiers and baseline restoration is to amplify the signal and to
restore the baseline of the signal in the middle of the display after the change of the signal
level, e.g. after the change of the DC offset voltage.
Pacemaker detection
Pacer detection has been made by using four slew rate detector circuits. The pacer detection
amplifiers have been realized at the front of the slew rate detectors independently of the ECG
measuring channels.
Respiration impedance supply

The 31.25 kHz sine wave generator is used as the respiration measurement signal supply.
Analog switches are used for connecting the sine wave to the ECG leads to be measured.
Respiration impedance amplifiers

Buffer amplifiers are used in respiration measurement. Analog switches are used for selecting
the measurement leads. There are also additional amplifiers for increasing the respiration
signal gain. When ECG measurement is 5-lead, the respiration measurement is always done
between R and F, independently on the ECG lead selection. When ECG measurement is 3-lead,
then the respiration measurement is happened at the same lead as the ECG measurement (I, II
or III).
ECG CPU
The CPU is a 16 bit H8/3052 single-chip microcomputer. It contains 128 kbytes of flash memory
and 4 kbytes of RAM. The clock frequency is 16 MHz.
RS485 communication
The communication to the CPU board of the monitor uses RS485 protocol. The RS485 driver
circuits are optically isolated from the processor of the module.
Power supply
The ECG board has a driver-controlled half-bridge switching power supply with 5 kV isolation.
The supply voltages have been regulated with linear regulators.
ECG filtering
B40i monitors have three ECG filtering modes:
MONITORING 0.5 to 40 Hz
DIAGNOSTIC 0.05 to 150 Hz
ST FILTER 0.05 to 40 Hz
The purpose of filtering is to reduce high frequency noise and low frequency (e.g. respiratory)
movement artifacts.
The monitor filter is used in normal monitoring. The diagnostic filter is used if more accurate
diagnostic information is needed. The ST filter gives more accurate information of ST segment,
but reduces high frequency noise.
The high-pass filters 0.5 Hz and 0.05 Hz are done with software. The monitor sends a command
to the hemodynamic module determining which of the corner frequencies 0.5 Hz or 0.05 Hz is
to be used.
The 50 Hz and 60 Hz reject filters are both low-pass filters with zero at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
correspondingly. They are software based filters used for the mains supply filtering.
In diagnostic mode the upper frequency is 150 Hz and it is limited by software.
1-28

4.2.6 STP board

STP module measures SpO2, two channels of temperatures and two channels of invasive blood
pressures.
The SpO2 measurement is made optically with an infrared light, a red light sources, and a
photosensitive detector. The SpO2 value and Pulse Rate are calculated based on the signals,
which are measured with the photosensitive detector in the SpO2 sensor. There are three
configurations of SpO2: GE SpO2, Masimo SpO2 and Nellcor SpO2. There are four kinds of STP
parameter board:
− GE SpO2 board
− STP board, integrated GE SpO2, Temperature and pressure
− TP board, integrated Temperature and pressure, communicated with Masimo OEM SpO2
through UART port to get SpO2 data and send to host.
− TP board, integrated Temperature and pressure, communicated with Nellcor OEM SpO2
through UART port to get SpO2 data and send to host.
The temperature measurement is designed for use with YSI-400 series NTC sensors.
The Invasive Pressure measurement is designed for use with the bridge type medical pressure
sensors.
Refer to the following block diagram.
PATIENT AND INVASIVE CANNULA OR

PATIENT AND SpO2 PROBE PATIENT AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CATHETER
FLUSHING KIT & INVASIVE PRESSURE

SpO2 TRUNK CABLE TEMPERATURE CONNECTOR
SENSOR WITH DOME
SpO2 CONNECTOR INPUT PROTECTION CIRCUITRY INV.PRESSURE CONNECTOR
SpO2 PROBE RECOGNITION & LED

DRIVE SELECTION MATRIX
TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL INV: PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
MEASUREMENT CURRENT MEASURE MENT VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER SOURCE AMPLIFIER SOURCE
SpO2 LED SpO2

DRIVE AMPLIFIER
A/D CONVERSION
STP CPU
RS 485 POWER SUPPLY

STP_brd_blck_dgrm.vsd
COMMUNICATION NV
MEMORY
ISOLATION ISOLATION
MODULE BUS CONNECTOR STP BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 12 STP block diagram
1-29

PATIENT AND INVASIVE CANNULA OR

PATIENT AND SPO2 PROBE PATIENT AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CATHETER
FLUSHING KIT & INVASIVE PRESSURE

SPO2 TRUNK CABLE TEMPERATURE CONNECTOR
SENSOR WITH DOME
SPO2 CONNECTOR INPUT PROTECTION CIRCUITRY INV.PRESSURE CONNECTOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL INV: PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL

MEASUREMENT CURRENT MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE
AMPLIFIER SOURCE AMPLIFIER SOURCE
MASIMO OR NELLCOR SPO2 MODULE

A/D CONVERSION
TEMPERATURE AND IBP CPU
NV MEMORY
RS 485
POWER SUPPLY COMMUNICATION
ISOLATION ISOLATION
TP +Masimo or Nellcor SPO2

BLOCK DIAGRAM
MODULE BUS CONNECTOR
Figure 13 TP board block diagram
Microprocessor unit
The CPU is a 16 bit H8/3052 single-chip microcomputer. It contains 128 kbytes of flash memory
and 4 kbytes of RAM. The clock frequency is 16 MHz.
High speed I/O is used to obtain a pulse control sequence necessary for pulse oximetry
measurement. Timing for the clock is from the oscillator.
1-30

Temperature measurement unit

The NTC-resistor value in the probe depends on the patient’s temperature. It is measured with
the following principle described below.
The constant current source is supplied about 38 μA current through the temperature sensor
(YSI 400-series NTC resistor). The constant current is caused a voltage over the temperature
sensor (NTC resistor). The voltage over the temperature sensor is amplified in a differential
amplifier stage. The amplified voltage is transferred to a controller of the STP board through an
A/D converter.
constant
Defibrillation/ESD protection current
resistors and diodes source
Temperature
sensors T1, T2
R Ref1 Ref2
T1 T2
Differential
R amplifier
0C:7k36 d/dt 0
0 To A/D
15C:3k54
converter
R
25C:2k53 0
38C:1k30
45C: 984 0
PSM_temp_meas_principle.vsd
R
Figure 14 Temperature measurement principle
Invasive blood pressure measurement unit

An isolated +5 V voltage is supplied to the pressure transducer. The differential voltage, which
depends on the pressure and the supplied voltage, is calculated from the bridge connection
(see the formula below).
Uout = Uin × pressure × 5 μV, where Uin is 5 V
 Uout = 25 μV × pressure [mmHg]
Pressure amplification is realized in the instrumentation amplifier. The gain of the amplifier is
set to keep the level of the signal transferred to the A/D converter within the measurement
range even when there are circumstantial offsets or offsets caused by the transducer. There is
a filter before the amplifier to attenuate high frequency disturbances.
1-31

Vin
Current
measurement G
to AD converter
Pressure
transducer
Instrum entation
amplifier
PSM_pressure_meas_principle.vsd
Vout
Input filter G
to A D converter
Figure 15 Pressure measurement principle
Pulse oximetry measurement section

LED control signals
The D/A converters of the microcontroller on the STP board set the LED intensity adjustment
values for the infrared and red LEDs of the SpO2 probe. The microcontroller on the STP board
switches ON (to the adjusted intensity) and OFF the SpO2 probe LEDs according to the
predetermined sequence.
LED driving circuit

Differential amplifiers measure the LED currents (LED current indication) of the SpO2 probe over
the shunt resistors placed in the LED current paths. The LED driving voltages (LED voltage
indication) are measured from the driver circuitry. The LED driving circuits also have MOSFET
transistor matrix to enable the use of different probe configurations.
Measured signal preamplification

The preamplifier is a bipolar/single-ended current-to-voltage converter with adjustable gain. A
higher gain is used for measuring thin tissue. The preamplification stage has also ambient light
reduction and a second amplifier stage.
1-32

LED Driving circuit 1 LED Intensity adjustment 1
LED ON/OFF control 1
LED voltage indication 1
LED current indication 1
LED Driving circuit 2 LED Intensity adjustment 2
LED ON/OFF control 2
LED voltage indication 2

SpO2
Probe LED current indication 2
LP Oximeter channel 1
Gain=7.5
DC-
suppression
Gain=7.5
Ambient reduction DC-

suppression
Amplifier: Gain=7.5
Preamplifier: Gain = 2
Current-to-voltage type
Spo2_measurement_blck_diagr.vsd
Bipolar/single-ended modes DC-
Adjustable gain suppression
Oximeter channel 4
LP
DE-MUX Amplifiers
Analog Digital
Figure 16 GE Pulse oximetry measurement block diagram
Red and infrared channel separation

It is possible to multiplex the detector signal to four different channels depending on the
content of the signal. The detector signal must at least multiplex into infrared and red signals.
Other channels are e.g. for diagnostic purposes.
1-33


4.3.1 Front panel connectors
Table 6 ECG connector
ECG Connector Pin No. Signal Name

1 R/RA; Right arm electrode
2 C2/V2; Chest electrode
4 L/LA; Left arm electrode
5 N/RL; Neutral/Right Leg Drive electrode
8 F/LL; Left Leg electrode
11 Cable Shield
Table 7 SpO2 connector
SpO2 connector Pin No. Signal Description

1 DET_A Photodiode anode
2 DET_C Photodiode cathode
3 DATA-
4 Wire 1/3 LED connection
5 IR_C IR LED cathode
6 OUTER SHIELD
7 DET_SHIELD
8 PRB_ID Bin/ID Resistor+
9 Wire 3/5 LED Connection
10 RED_C RED LED cathode
11 DATA+
1-34

Table 8 Invasive blood pressure connectors (IBP1, IBP2)
Invasive blood pressure Pin Signal Description

connectors (Dual BP) No.
1 BP_+VREF BP transducer excitation voltage, channel
1
2 BP SIG+ BP transducer signal positive (+), channel
1
3 BP_+VREF BP transducer excitation voltage, channel
2
4 AGND Analog ground
5 BP SIG+ BP transducer signal positive (+), channel
2
6 SHIELD BP cable shield
7 AGND Analog ground
8 BP SIG1 BP transducer signal negative (-), channel
1
9 BP SIG2 BP transducer signal negative (-), channel
2
10 BP1_ID BP1 probe identification
11 NC Not connected
Table 9 Temp connector (T1, T2)
Temp connector Pin No Signal

1 Sensor drive current
2 Input from temperature sensor, channel 1
3 Not connected
4 Not connected
5 Thermistor ID (LOW= Temperature error,
HIGH=YSI 400 series)
6 Cable shield
7 Analog ground
8 Input from temperature sensor, channel 2
9 Not connected
10 Not connected
11 Digital ground
1-35

4.4 Measurement principle

4.4.1 NIBP
NIBP (Non-Invasive Blood Pressure) is an indirect method for measuring blood pressure.
The NIBP parameter conforms to EN1060-1:1995/A2:2009 Specification for Non-invasive
sphygmomanometers.
The NIBP measurement is performed according to the oscillometric measuring principle. The
cuff is inflated with a pressure slightly higher than the presumed systolic pressure, and deflated
at a speed based on the patient’s pulse, collecting data from the oscillations caused by the
pulsating artery. Based on these oscillations, values for systolic, mean, and diastolic pressures
are calculated.
The following parts are necessary for the NIBP measurement:
• hemo module
• twin hose (adult or infant model)
• blood pressure cuffs (various sizes)
4.4.2 ECG
Electrocardiography analyzes the electrical activity of the heart by measuring the electrical
potential produced with electrodes placed on the surface of the body.
ECG reflects:
• electrical activity of the heart
• normal/abnormal function of the heart
• effects of anesthesia on heart function
• effects of surgery on heart function
See the “User's Guide” or the “User’s Reference Manual” for electrodes’ positions and other
information.
4.4.3 Pulse oximetry

A pulse oximeter measures the light absorption of blood at two wavelengths, one in the near
infrared (about 940 nm) and the other in the red region (about 660 nm) of the light spectrum.
These wavelengths are emitted by LEDs in the SpO2 probe, the light is transmitted through
peripheral tissue and is finally detected by a PIN-diode opposite the LEDs in the probe. The
pulse oximeter derives the oxygen saturation (SpO2) using an empirically determined
relationship between the relative absorption at the two wavelengths and the arterial oxygen
saturation SaO2.
In order to measure the arterial saturation accurately, pulse oximeters use the component of
light absorption giving variations synchronous with heart beat as primary information on the
arterial saturation.
A general limitation of pulse oximetry is that due to the use of only two wavelengths, only two
hemoglobin species can be discriminated by the measurement.
The modern pulse oximeters are empirically calibrated either against fractional saturation
SaO2frac;
1-36

HbO2
SaO2 frac =
HbO2 + Hb + Dyshemoglo bin Formula 1
or against functional saturation SaO2func;
HbO 2
SaO 2 func =
HbO 2 + Hb Formula 2
Functional saturation is more insensitive to changes of carboxyhemoglobin and
methemoglobin concentrations in blood.
The oxygen saturation percentage SpO2 measured by the Datex-Ohmeda module is calibrated
against functional saturation SaO2func. The advantage of this method is that the accuracy of
SpO2 measurement relative to SaO2func can be maintained even at rather high concentrations
of carboxyhemoglobin in blood. Independent of the calibration method, pulse oximeters are
not able to correctly measure oxygen content of the arterial blood at elevated
carboxyhemoglobin or methemoglobin levels.
Plethysmographic pulse wave

The plethysmographic waveform is derived from the IR signal and reflects the blood pulsation
at the measuring site. Thus the amplitude of the waveform represents the perfusion.
Pulse rate
The pulse rate calculation is done by peak detection of the plethysmographic pulse wave. The
signals are filtered to reduce noise and checked to separate artifacts.
Intensity of
Imax (DC-component) Imax
transmitted
light AC-component
Imin
Transmitted Variable absorption

light due to pulse added
volume of arterial
blood
Arterial blood
Venous blood
absorption_of_light.vsd
Tissue
Time
No pulsation Pulsatile blood
Incident light
Figure 17 Absorption of infrared light in the finger
1-37

SpO2 sensor connector
IRED
Emitter
RED
PSM_absorption_of_infrared.vsd
Detector
Figure 18 Pulse oximetry probe parts layout and schematic diagram

The standard probe is a finger clamp probe which contains the light source LEDs in one half
and the photodiode detector in the other half. Different kinds of probes are available from GE
Healthcare.
Summary of clinical studies used to establish the SpO2 accuracy claims

NOTE: The pulse oximeter equipment measurements are statistically distributed, only about
two-thirds of pulse oximeter equipment measurements can be expected to fall within ±Arms of
the value measured by a CO-oximeter. The CO-oximeter should have a SaO2 accuracy of 1% (1
standard deviation) or better over the range of which the manufacturer makes SpO2 accuracy
claims. A controlled desaturation study supporting a claimed range of SpO2 accuracy from 70
to 100% SaO2 can be supported with SaO2 data collected over the range of 73 to 97% SaO2.
Nellcor Oximax Technology with Oximax sensors
Measurement modules using Nellcor Oximax Technology with Oximax sensors have been
validated for no motion accuracy in controlled hypoxia studies with healthy nonsmoking adult
volunteers over the specified saturation SpO2 range(s). Pulse oximeter SpO2 readings were
compared to SaO2 values of drawn blood samples measured by hemoximetry. Subjects used
to validate SpO2 measurement accuracies were healthy and recruited from the local
population. Subjects comprised both adult men and women and spanned a range of skin
pigmentations. Because scatter and bias of pulse oximeter SpO2 and blood SaO2 comparisons
commonly increase as the saturation decreases, and accuracy specifications are calculated
from data spanning the stated range, different accuracy values may result when describing
partially overlapping ranges. When sensors are used on neonatal subjects as recommended,
the specified accuracy range is increased by ± 1 digit, as compared to adult usage, to account
for the theoretical effect on oximeter measurements of fetal hemoglobin in neonatal blood.
Masimo SET Technology with LNOP and LNCS sensors
Measurement modules using Masimo SET Technology with LNOP and LNCS sensors have been
validated for no motion accuracy in human blood studies on healthy adult volunteers in
induced hypoxia studies in the range of 70-100% SpO2 against a laboratory co-oximeter and
ECG monitor. Subjects comprised both adult men and women and spanned a range of skin
pigmentations. One percent was added to accuracies for neonatal/infant sensors to account
for accuracy variation due to properties of fetal hemoglobin. Refer to the directions for use of
the Masimo SET sensors.
1-38

GE Trusignal Technology sensors

Measurement modules using GE Trusignal Technology with OxyTip+/Trusignal sensors have
been validated for no motion accuracy in controlled hypoxia studies with healthy nonsmoking
adult volunteers over the specified saturation SpO2 range(s). Pulse oximeter SpO2 readings
were compared to SaO2 values of drawn blood samples measured by hemoximetry. Subjects
comprised both adult men and women and spanned a range of skin pigmentations.
GE Oxy-AF and GE Oxy-SE sensors have been validated for neonatal accuracy. The subject
demographics included 28 neonatals and 1 infant (15 females and 14 males). The subjects
ranged in age from newborn to 37 days old. The weights ranged from 560 to 3060 g. The skin
tones included in the study were light to dark. For neonatal study, the Arms of the collected
convenience samples are 2.7, Oxy-AF sensor in the SaO2 range of 87-100% collected 52 data
points, Oxy-SE sensor in the SaO2 range of 81-100% collected 53 data points.
Test methods used to establish the accuracy claims during low perfusion
Nellcor Oximax Technology with Oximax sensors have been validated for SpO2 low perfusion
accuracy in bench top testing using Nellcor's PS II simulator with signal strength setting of
0.03% modulation and oxygen saturation levels of 70 to 100% at a pulse rate of 90 BPM.
Nellcor Oximax Technology with Oximax sensors have been validated for low perfusion pulse
rate accuracy in bench top testing using Nellcor's PS II simulator at a simulated low perfusion
level of 0.10% modulation in the pulse rate range of 40 to 250 beats per minutes (BPM) at a
SpO2 of 95%.
Masimo SET Technology with LNOP and LNCS sensors have been validated for low perfusion
accuracy in bench top testing against Biotek Index 2 Simulator and Masimo's simulator with
signal strength setting of greater than 0.02% and a % transmission of greater than 5% for
saturation ranging from 70%-100%. One percent was added to accuracies for neonatal/infant
sensors to account for accuracy variation due to properties of fetal hemoglobin.
Test methods used to establish the accuracy claims during motion

Masimo SET Technology with LNOP and LNCS sensors have been validated for motion
accuracy in human blood studies on healthy adult volunteers in induced hypoxia studies while
performing rubbing and tapping motions, at 2 to 4 Hz at an amplitude of 1 to 2 cm and
non-repetitive motion between 1 to 5 Hz at an amplitude of 2 to 3 cm in the range of 70% to
100% SpO2 compared against a laboratory COoximeter and ECG monitor. The variation equals
plus or minus one standard deviation, which encompasses 68% of the population. One percent
was added to accuracies for neonatal/infant sensors to account for accuracy variation due to
properties of fetal hemoglobin.
NOTE: Accuracy during motion has not been specified for Masimo SET sensors LNOP TC-I, LNCS
TC-I and LNCS TF-I.
Measurement modules using GE Trusignal Technology with TS-AF and TS-AP sensors have
been validated for motion accuracy in controlled hypoxia studies with healthy non-smoking
adult volunteers over the specified saturation SpO2 range(s). The following motion types were
used: mechanically induced 3 Hz tapping motion at an amplitude of 1-2 cm, patient induced
non-repetitive rubbing motion, and patient induced non-repetitive hand motion in supine
1-39

position. Pulse oximeter Sp02 readings were compared to SaO2 values of drawn blood samples
measured by CO-oximetry. Subjects comprised both adult men and women and spanned a
range of skin pigmentations.
Test methods used to establish pulse rate accuracy

Nellcor Oximax Technology with Oximax sensors have been validated for pulse rate accuracy
in bench top testing using Nellcor's PS II simulator over the specified range at a SpO2 of 95%.
Masimo SET Technology with LNOP and LNCS sensors have been validated for pulse rate
accuracy over the specified range in bench top testing against a Biotek Index 2 simulator.
Measurement modules using GE Trusignal technology sensors have been validated for pulse
rate accuracy over the specified range in bench top testing against a patient simulator.
4.4.4 Temperature
The temperature is measured by a probe whose resistance varies when the temperature
changes, called NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient) resistor.
The resistance can be measured by two complementary methods:
• Applying a constant voltage across the resistor and measuring the current that flows
through it.
• Applying a constant current through the resistor and measuring the voltage that is
generated across it.
Hemo module uses the constant current method. The NTC-resistor is connected in series with a
normal resistor and a constant current is applied through them. The temperature dependent
voltage can be detected at the junction of the resistors, thus producing the temperature signal
from the patient. The signal is amplified by analog amplifiers and further processed by digital
electronics.
4.4.5 Invasive blood pressure

To measure invasive blood pressure, a catheter is inserted into an artery or vein. The invasive
pressure setup, consisting of a connecting tubing, a pressure transducer, an intravenous bag
of normal saline, all connected together by stopcocks, is attached to the catheter. The
transducer is placed at the same level with the heart, and is electrically zeroed.
The transducer is a piezo-resistive device that converts the pressure signal to a voltage. The
monitor interprets the voltage signal so that pressure data and pressure waveforms can be
displayed.
4.4.6 Respiration
Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax between ECG electrodes. The respiration
signal is made by supplying current between the electrodes and by measuring the differential
current from the electrodes. The signal measured is the impedance change caused by
breathing. The respiration rate is calculated from these impedance changes, and the
respiration waveform is displayed on the screen.
1-40

2 Hardware
installation
Installation
1 Installation
Safety precautions
Warnings
• The monitor or its components should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the monitor and its components
should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
• After transferring or reinstalling the monitor, always check that it is properly connected
and all parts are securely attached. Pay special attention to this in case of stacked
mounting.
• Use only manufacturer approved mounts.
• Don’t install the monitor above the patient.
• Do not use the monitor in high electromagnetic fields (for example, during magnetic
resonance imaging).
• EXPLOSION OR FIRE -Using non-recommended batteries could result in injury/burns to
the patients or users. Only use batteries recommended or manufactured by GE.
• Do not incinerate a battery or store at high temperatures. Serious injury or death could
result.
• Allow temperature of the monitor to stabilize to operating temperature range before
connecting to power line.
• NETWORK INTEGRITY — The monitor resides on the CARESCAPE, S/5 network. It is possible
that inadvertent or malicious network activity could adversely affect patient monitoring.
The integrity of the network is the responsibility of the hospital.
• INTERFACING OTHER EQUIPMENT - Devices may only be interconnected with each other
or to parts of the system when it has been determined by qualified biomedical personnel
that there is no danger to the patient, the operator, or the environment as a result. In
those instances where there is any element of doubt concerning the safety of the
connected devices, the user must contact the manufacturers concerned (or other
informed experts) for proper use. In all cases, safe and proper operation should be verified
with the applicable manufacturer’s instructions for use, and system standards IEC
60601-1-1/EN 60601-1-1 must be complied with.
• The medical electrical equipment or medical electrical system may be interfered with by
other equipment, even if that other equipment complies with CISPR EMISSION
requirements.
Cautions
• The monitor display is fragile. Ensure that it is not placed near a heat source or exposed to
mechanical shocks, pressure, moisture or direct sunlight.
2-1

1.1 Unpacking instructions

1. Confirm that the packing box is undamaged. If the box is damaged, contact the shipper.
2. Open the top of the box and carefully unpack all components.
3. Confirm that all components are undamaged. If any of the components is damaged,
contact the shipper.
4. Confirm that all components are included. If any of the components is missing, contact
your GE Healthcare distributor.
1.2 Choosing location

Environmental requirements
• Install the patient monitor to a location that meets the specified environmental
requirements of operating temperature, humidity and atmospheric pressure.
• Set up the device in a location which affords sufficient ventilation. The ventilation
openings of the device must not be obstructed.
EMI & RFI interference:

• The patient monitor should be isolated from sources of strong electromagnetic and radio
frequency interference.
NOTE: Refer to "ElectroMagnetic Compatibility" for more information.
1.3 Mounting the monitor

Mounting of monitor to the Wall Mount, Rollstand, Wall Mount with standard arm or Counter
Top Mount is described in a separate instruction sheet delivered with each mount.
NOTE: Refer to the “Supplier and accessories” to identify the compatible mounting hardware.
1.4 Connection to power

Testing the battery charge
Before installing a battery to the patient monitor, verify the battery’s state of charge. Press the
green TEST button on the battery. The number of charge level indicator LEDs that illuminate
indicates the approximate charge remaining in the battery.
− Four LEDs illuminated: 75% – 100% of full-charge capacity.
− Three LEDs illuminated: 50% – 74.9% of full-charge capacity.
− Two LEDs illuminated: 25% – 49.9% of full-charge capacity.
− One LED illuminated: 10% – 24.9% of full-charge capacity.
− One LED flashing: < 10% of full-charge capacity remaining.
2-2

Installation
Installing the batteries
1. Open the lid of the battery compartment by the

side of the monitor. Move the latch up or down.
2. Put in the new battery. Make sure that the
charging indicator is facing to the back side of
the monitor, then push the battery in all the
way, move the latch and close the lid. Power on
the monitor, check the monitor indicators.
Connecting to mains
Connect the power cord to the mains power inlet at the back of the monitor and to the wall
socket.
NOTE: Before taking the monitor into use for the first time, the batteries should be fully charged.
Keep the monitor connected to the mains until the Battery charging symbol disappears (may
take up to 5 hours if the batteries are fully discharged).
Battery charging symbol
WARNING The power cord may only be connected to a three-wire, grounded, hospital
grade receptacle
1.5 Check configuration

Check the monitor’s license and record in C. Installation and checkout form, B40i. The later set
up and check out shall according to monitor’s configuration.
1. Turn on the monitor, enter to the service menu: Monitor Setup > Install/Service
(16-4-34) > Service (26-23-8)
2. Enter to license control menu: SW Management > License
3. Record the product license.
4. If the configuration is different with your order, contact GE Healthcare distributor.
2-3

1.6 Connection to Network

WARNING Do not use with iCentral software V5.0.3 and earlier.
WARNING Do not use Mobile Care Server software V5.2 and earlier.
CAUTION Install HL7 network interfaces as specified, and only by qualified personnel.
NOTE: Not all the features mentioned following is available you monitor, according to your
monitor’s configuration to set up.
The B40i monitor has been verified to be able to work in CARESCAPETM Network and S/5
network environments. Other network infrastructures are not supported.
The B40i monitor has EMR connectivity. There are three ways to acquire trended vital sign data
from B40i patient monitor: HL7 directly from monitor, HL7 from the CARESCAPE Gateway, or
connecting to the serial port of each monitor. The B40i monitor HL7 (Health Level Seven)
message match with IHE PCD-01 OBR/OBX format.
• In CARESCAPE network, the B40i monitor can:
− communicate with GE CARESCAPE pro CIC version 4.0.8, 4.1.1 and 5.1.0
− compatible with Aware Gateway Server V1.6
− compatible with CARESCAPE Gateway server V1.
− compatible with Mobile Care Server V6.0
− compatible with S/5 Collect V4.0
The B40i monitor can talk to at most 4 CIC Central stations, 1 Aware Gateway Server or 1
CARESCAPE Gateway Server, 1 Mobile Care Server and 1000 other devices simultaneously
in one CARESCAPE network. The B40i monitor can’t be set as the Time Master in
CARESCAPE network.
• In S/5 network, the B40i monitor can:
− communication with iCentral version 5.1.1 and 5.1.2.
− compatible with S/5 Collect V4.0
− compatible with Mobile Care Server later than V5.2
The monitor does not support Patient Data Server; B40i realtime patient data can't be viewed
on other monitors (e.g. Dash 3000/4000/5000, Solar 8000, B850, B650) except unit name, bed
name and alarm message.
2-4

Installation
CARESCAPE Network
CIS/HIS Systems CARESCAPE Administrative VLAN Network
1
Hospital Intranet
1
Internet
CARESCAPE IX VLAN Network

CARESCAPE? CARESCAPE CARESCAPE Mobile
CIC Pro Monitor B850 Monitor B650 Care
Server
CARESCAPE MC VLAN Network Layer 3 Switch
RX
Network
1 1
HL7 PCD-01 HL7 PCD-01
Outbound Outbound
ApexPro® Telemetry
Dash® B40i B40i
Patient Monitor Patient Monitor Patient Monitor
1. HL7 outbound from monitor though CNI V2 switch, need ‘Unity and HL7’ license
Hospital Network
CIS/HIS Systems
2
Hospital Intranet
Internet 2 Hospital Switch
HL7 PCD-01
Outbound
B40i
Patient Monitor
2. HL7 outbound from monitor though hospital switch, need ‘HL7’ license
Notes
• This switch should support intervlan routing function.
• The hospital or the third party can choose GE offered switch or other types. If you need to
use GE offered switch, please contact to GE ND&I Team to setup CARESCAPE Network
Infrastucture version 2.
• If hospital or the third party design networks by themselves, the hospital or the third party
has full responsibility for the function and the risk of their network.
2-5

1.6.1 Pre-installation requirements

Ensure that the applicable network infrastructure is in place prior to the installation of the
patient monitor.
Acquire the network configuration information from the hospital IT or the related project
documentation and installation files.
MC Network
• The MC Network infrastructure shall be installed according to the "CARESCAPE Network
Configuration Guide".
• The installation site of the patient monitor shall have a wall jack and a network patch
cable for the MC Network.
S/5 Network
• The S/5 Network shall be installed according to the "S/5 Network Installation Guide". Refer
to the "iCentral and iCentral Client Service Manual" for iCentral installation instructions.
• The installation site of the patient monitor shall have a wall jack and a network patch
cable for the S/5 Network.
HL7 network
The HL7 Network shall be installed according to the "B40i patient monitor HL7 reference
manual".
1.6.2 To connect the network

MC and S/5 network
Use the CAT-5 network cable to connect the monitor to the network.
1. Make sure that the power is switched off.
2. Connect the one RJ-45 connector to network port at the back of the monitor.
3. Connect the other RJ-45 connector to the corresponding port on the wallbox.
4. Turn on the monitor and set up the network configuraiton (refer to 1.6.3. Network
configuration).
5. Confirm that the network symbol and 'Network made' message are displayed in the
upper part of the screen.
1.6.3 Network configuration

How to set up MC network
1. Connect network cable to the ethernet port on the rear of the monitor. Connect the other
end of the cable to the clinical network.
2. Enter the network service mode in the monitor:
Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) > Service (26-23-8) > Frame > Network
3. Set up Unity configuration, enter to Network Config
• Unit Name:
It is used for setting the unit name in the monitor. The default unit name is “X”.
NOTE: Unit Name here should be set to be same as CIC Unit Name.
2-6

Installation
• Bed Name:
It is used for setting the bed name in the monitor. The default bed name is the last
five characters of the MAC address, excluding the colon delimiter characters.
• MCS IP Address
It is used for setting Mobile Care Server’s IP address which the monitor will talk to.
It is gray when network license is not “Unity” or “Unity+HL7”.
• Save Changes:
It is gray if the changes have not been done to the menu information.
NOTE: When save changes the monitor need restart.
4. Set up the TCP/IP configuration: TCP/IP Config > TCP/IP Config
• Configure the monitor’s IP address, subnet mask, default gateway.
NOTE: If the IP address or both of unit name and bed name duplicate with other
CARESCAPE network devices, the alarm will be given to the new added monitors.
• Save the configuration after configuring the TCP/IP.
NOTE: After saving changes the monitor need restart.
WARNING If only B40i monitors and Dash monitors in the Unity network, do not set up
B40i monitors with the highest IP address. For this may cause the Unity time
sync function can’t work with Dash monitors.
5. If the monitor does not connect to network correctly, you may also need to set up the
speed and duplex configuration:
TCP/IP Config > TCP/IP Config > Speed and Duplex
Choose the suitable settings according to your network environment. The default setting
is AUTO.
How to set up S/5 network

1. Connect network cable to the ethernet port on the rear of the monitor. Connect the other
end of the cable to the clinical network.
2. Enter the network service mode in the monitor:
Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) > Service (26-23-8) > Frame > Network
3. Set up S/5 network configuration, enter to Dri config
Set up following information:
• DRI level:
It is used for setting the monitor’s network communication. should be selected to
2009
• Virtual Plug ID:
Should enter 5 digit numbers, which is the same as in iCentral.
NOTE: If you don’t have the virtual plug ID number in iCentral, please refer to the
“iCentral User's Reference Manual” to set up in iCentral first.
• Transfer Mode:
It is used for choosing transfer mode: DRI/ETH or DRI/UDP
Should be selected to DRI/ETH
• Care Area:
It is used for setting care area “OR” or “Non OR” for monitor.
The monitor with different care area settings will behave differently in iCentral.
2-7

• Save Changes:
Select “Save Changes“ to take in use changes made in this page.
NOTE: In S/5 network protocol, no need to set up the TCP/IP settings.
NOTE: For other the network menu’s instruction, please refer to 3.2. Network in “Service
Menu” chapter for more details.
How to set up the HL7

1. Set up Unit name and bed name first:
Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) > Service (26-23-8) > Frame > Network >
Network Config > Unit name and Bed Name.
2. Enter the HL7 service mode in the monitor:
Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) > Service (26-23-8) > Frame > Network > HL7.
3. Set up HL7 configuration, enter to HL7 Config
Set up following information:
• HL7 Receiver IP
Set up the HL7 receiver IP address
• HL7 Receiver Port
Set up the HL7 receiver port
• HL7 Interval
Set up the interval value
• HL7 Patient Class
Set up HL7 patient class
E: Emergency, I: Inpatient, O: Outpatient, P: Preadmit, R: Reocurring patient, B:
Obstetrics, U: Unknown
• Save Changes
It is gray if the changes have not been done to the menu information.
1.7 Inserting and removing the E modules
To use the E module, your monitor need pre-configure the extension rack from manufacture.
The E module options: airway gas module (E-miniC, E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO), E-Entropy
module.
2-8

Installation
To insert module:
1. Align the module with the insertion guides
2. Push the module into the monitor frame until it clicks and stops.
3. Pull the module outwards to insure the module is firmly seated.
To remove module:
1. Pressing the release latch, on the bottom of the module.
2. Grasp the module firmly and pull out of the Frame. Make sure not to drop it when it comes
out.
WARNING When detaching modules, be careful not to drop them. Always support with
one hand while pulling out with other.
1.8 Monitor connections
11
10
5 3
4
8
7
6
Figure 3 Font view

(1) Transportation handle
(2) Alarm light
(3) The Trim Knob
(4) Keyboard/membrane switch
(5) Battery compartment
(6) Guide rail for GCX mounting
(7) Mains power and battery LEDs
(8) On/Off key
(9) Hemo connectors
(10) E modules
(11) Recorder module
2-9

Figure 4 Rear view connections

(1) Receptacle for power cord
(2) Serial port
(3) Defibrillator connector
(4) Nurse call connector
(5) Network connector
(6) Equipotential connector
(7) Multi I/O connector
NOTE: The Multi I/O with ports 2,3,4 are optional parts for customer.
1.9 Visual indicators

Function Specification Explanation
External power supply Green LED Indicates when monitor is powered from
mains
Battery operation Green LED Indicates when monitor is powered from
internal batteries
Battery condition Orange LED Indicates when monitor is charging
batteries (solid) or battery failure (flashing).
Alarm Light Highly visible Ease alarm detection from distance.
Red/Yellow/Cyan
light
1.10 Installation checkout

Refer to the 3. Installation checkout in Chapter 3 for procedure.
2-10

3 Maintenance
Instructions
1 Instructions
1.1 Introduction
These instructions include procedures of system maintenance for the B40i. It’s include four
sections:
• Electrical safety tests.
• Installation checkout, which should be performed after installation and service
configuration.
• Maintenance and checkout, which should be performed every 12 months.
• Adjustments and calibrations
NOTE: Please complete the check form when performing the corresponding procedures.
NOTE: For the Gas modules maintenance and calibration, please refer to “8. E-miniC Module”
and “9. E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO Modules“.
NOTE: For the Entropy module maintenance and calibration, please refer to “10. E-Entropy
Module“.
The symbol  in the instructions means that the procedure performed should be signed in
the check form.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order, bypassing those that are not
applicable for a particular monitor.
To enter the service menus, you need following passwords:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8)
In case you evaluate the measurement accuracy with a patient simulator, add the simulator’s
accuracy specification to the one for the monitor.
CAUTION Failure on the part of all responsible individuals, hospitals or institutions,
employing the use of this device, to implement the recommended
maintenance schedule may cause equipment failure. The manufacturer does
not, in any manner, assume the responsibility for performing the
recommended maintenance schedule, unless an equipment maintenance
agreement exists. The sole responsibility rests with the individuals, hospitals, or
institutions utilizing the device.
CAUTION Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment should perform the tests
and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void warranty of
the unit.
CAUTION Wear a static control wrist strap when handling PCB boards. Electrostatic
discharge may damage components on the board.
3-1

1.2 Recommended tools

NOTE: Use only properly maintained, calibrated and traceable measurement equipment for the
specified calibrations and adjustments to ensure accuracy.
NOTE: A functional tester cannot be used to assess the accuracy of pulse oximeter for monitor.
Table 1 Recommended accessories and tools
Accessories
A rigid cylinder or pipe
NIBP cuff
Adult NIBP cuff hose with cuff ID
Infant NIBP cuff hose with cuff ID
Tubing parts to connect a manometer and a pump to
the NIPB cuff and hose.
Dual invasive pressure adapter cable
ECG accessories, IEC or AHA
- Multi-link 3-lead integrated cable and leadwire
- Multi-link 5-leadwire set
- Multi-link 3/5-lead ECG trunk cable
SpO2 finger probe
SpO2 Interconnect Cable
Temperature dual cable
CO2 Sampling line 3m/10 ft
Tool
A multiparameter patient simulator with IBP, Temp
adpter cables
Screwdrivers PH1, PH2
NOTE: For details on recommended accessories see “Supplies and Accessories“ catalog.
3-2

Electrical Safety Tests
2 Electrical Safety Tests

Electrical safety tests provide a method of determining if potential electrical health hazards to
the patient or operator of the device exist.
GE recommends that the qualified personnel performing the tests.
2.1 Test setup

Test conditions
Perform electrical safety tests under normal ambient conditions of temperature, humidity and
pressure.
Test equipment
The recommended test equipment required to perform electrical safety tests is listed below.
Tool Specification
Satety Analyzer/Leakage Current Tester Equivalent to the circuits
shown
Ground Bond Tester 0 – 1 ohm
Safety Test Body Kita P/N M1155870 or equivalent
a Instead of the test bodies included in the safety test body kit, other applicable test
bodies with all pins connected together may be used.
Perform electrical safety tests using an electrical safety analyzer per IEC 60601-1, UL 60601-1,
EN 60601-1 or CSA C22.2 No. 601.1. The schematics in the section provide a general
understanding of the test equipment. Actual configuration of test equipment may vary.
The patient monitor being tested should be placed on an insulating surface.
NOTE: Before proceeding, make sure that all test equipment is properly calibrated, maintained
and functioning.
NOTE: Refer to the instructions delivered with the safety analyzer to perform each test.
NOTE: GE recommends that the qualified personnel performing the tests should record the test
results of each electrical safety test, for example by using the installation / maintenance check
forms included in this manual.
System setup
These instructions are intended for every component in the system. Ensure that all system
components are properly connected to the patient monitor as described in chapter “2.
Hardware installation”.
2.2 Power Outlet Test

Verify that the power outlet is wired correctly per the country’s electrical code standard before
starting the following electrical safety tests. The results of the following tests will be inaccurate
unless a properly wired power outlet is used. Use only non-isolated power outlets when
performing safety tests.
3-3

2.3 Power cord and plug

Verify the power cord being used with the patient monitor is good. The following are a couple
of things to check for in this regard:
• Inspect the power cord for wear or damage regularly. If damage is suspected, test for
continuity through each conductor of the power cord connector.
• Verify line, neutral, and earth conductors are properly connected to the power cord plug
and are not short-circuited. Replace the power cord, as necessary with a
regulatory-approved cord for the country of use.

WARNING Use only AC power cords recommended or manufactured by GE.
2.4 Ground (earth) integrity

Listed below are two methods for checking the ground (earth) integrity, “Ground Continuity
Test” and “Impedance of Protective Earth Connection.” These tests determine whether the
device's exposed metal and power inlet's earth (ground) connection has a power ground fault
condition.
Perform the in accordance with your local regulations.
Refer to the instructions contained with the safety analyzer to perform each test.
2.4.1 Ground Continuity Test

The measuring device (MD) in the diagram below may be a DMM or part of a safety analyzer.
NOTE: The measuring device (MD) represents the network and voltage measuring instrument
and its frequency characteristics per IEC 60601-1.
3-4

Acceptance criteria:
• For equipment without a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective earth
terminal and any accessible metal part which is protectively earthed shall not exceed 0.1
ohms.
• For equipment with a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective earth
pin in the mains plug and any accessible metal part which is protectively earthed shall
not exceed 0.2 ohms.
2.4.2 Impedance of Protective Earth Connection

This test, unlike a ground continuity test, will also stress the ground system by using special
ground bond testers.
This test normally is only required as a manufacturing production test to receive safety agency
compliance. Some country agencies do require this test after field equipment repairs (i.e.,
Germany’s DIN VDE 0751 standards). Consult your country/local safety agency if in question.
Check compliance as follows:
(1) A current of 25A from a current source with a frequency of 50 or 60 Hz with a no-load
voltage not exceeding 6 V is passed for at least 5 seconds, but no more than 10 seconds,
through the protective earth terminal or the protective earth pin in the mains plug and
each accessible metal part which could become live in case of failure in basic insulation.
(2) The voltage drop between the parts described is measured and the impedance
determined from the current and voltage drop. It shall not exceed the values indicated.
When taking this measurement, move the unit’s power cord around. There should be no
fluctuations in resistance.

• For equipment without a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective earth
terminal any accessible metal part which is protectively earthed shall not exceed 0.1
Ohms.
• For equipment with a power supply cord, the impedance between the protective earth
pin in the mains plug and any accessible metal part which is protectively earthed shall
not exceed 0.2 ohms.
2.5 Earth leakage current test

This test measures the current leakage flowing from the mains part through or across the
insulation into the protective earth conductor of the device under test.
Perform this test both in Normal Condition (NC) and in a Single Fault Condition (SFC), where one
of the supply conductors is open at a time. Perform the test with normal and reverse polarity.
NOTE: Refer to the instructions delivered with the safety analyzer to perform this test.
3-5

Leakage Tester
Power Cord
HIGH NORM Power Cord
LOW
GND
GND
RVS Device
Under
Test
0.15µF
DMM 1K
10
DMM set to measure AC voltage
NOTE: The measuring device (MD) represents the network and voltage measuring instrument
and its frequency characteristics per IEC 60601-1.
(1) Configure the safety analyzer as follows (NC):
• Polarity - NORMAL
• Neutral - CLOSED
(2) Power on the device under test.
(3) Read and record the current leakage indicated on the tester.
(4) Configure the safety analyzer as follows (SFC):
• Neutral - OPEN
• Polarity - REVERSED
• Neutral - OPEN
(10) Power off the device under test.

Acceptance criteria in NC (Normal condition):
• All readings shall be less than or equal to 300 μA for installations that require compliance
to UL 60601-1 requirements.
to EN 60601-1 / IEC 60601-1 requirements.
3-6

Acceptance criteria in SFC (Single fault condition) - one of the supply conductors open at a time:
• All readings shall be less than or equal to 1 mA.
2.6 Enclosure (Touch) leakage current test

This test measures current leakage through the exposed conductive parts on the device under
test.
Perform the test in Normal Condition (NC) and in two different Single Fault Conditions (SFC): 1)
earth open and 2) one of the supply conductors open at a time. Perform the test with normal
and reverse polarity.
Leakage Tester
Power Cord
HIGH NORM Power Cord

LOW
GND
RVS
Device
Open
Under
Closed GND Test
0.15µF
DMM 1K
10
Probe to exposed conductive chassis
DMM set to measure AC voltage
NOTE: The MD represents the network and voltage measuring instrument and its frequency
characteristics per IEC 60601-1.
• GND (Earth) - CLOSED
(2) Power on device under test.
(3) Read and record the current leakage indicated on tester.
• Neutral - OPEN
• GND (Earth) - OPEN
3-7

• Neutral - OPEN

Acceptance criteria in NC:
• All readings shall be less than or equal to 100 µA
Acceptance criteria in SFC - earth open or one of the supply conductors open at a time:
to UL 60601-1 requirements.
to EN 60601-1 / IEC 60601-1 requirements.
2.7 Patient leakage current tests - overview

The following table specifies the parameter modules and the related patient connectors to be
tested in the “2.7.1. Patient (source) leakage current test” and in the “2.7.2. Patient (sink) leakage
current tests”.
Use the safety test body kit, P/N M1155870 (or equivalent), to perform patient leakage current
tests. This safety test body kit contains various patient connectors where all pins are shorted
out together. For information on which test body to use for each patient connector, refer to the
service instructions included in the safety test body kit.
NOTE: If not otherwise stated in the table below, each test body is connected directly to the
specified connector in the patient module.
Table 2 Patient connectors to be tested with each module
3-8

Module Patient connector

Hemo ECG and SpO2
E-Entropy 1. Connect an Entropy sensor cable to the
module.
2. Connect the specified test body to the
Entropy sensor and cable.
2.7.1 Patient (source) leakage current test

This procedure measures the leakage current from an applied part connector of the device to
ground.
Perform the test in Normal Condition (NC) and in two different Single Fault Conditions (SFC): 1)
earth open and 2) one of the supply conductors open at a time. Perform test with normal and
reverse polarity.
Leakage Tester
/,1( NORM Power Cord

AC Mains
1(875$/
($57+
RVS
Device
120K
Under
Closed GND
Test
Patient connector
0.15μF
Test Body
DMM 1K
10
NOTE: Perform this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors
specified in Table 2.
• Neutral - OPEN
3-9

• Neutral - OPEN
(15) Repeat this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors

Acceptance criteria in NC:
Acceptance criteria in SFC - earth open or one of the supply conductors open at a time
2.7.2 Patient (sink) leakage current tests

This procedure measures the leakage current from an applied part connector of the device to
ground. Perform the test in Normal Condition (NC) with normal and reverse polarity.
3-10

Leakage Tester
Power Cord
LINE NORM Power Cord
NEUTRAL
EARTH
RVS
Device
120K
Under
Closed GND
Test
0.15μF Patient connector

Test Body
DMM 1K
10 (Keep cable length as
short as possible.)
NOTE: Per IEC 60601-1, the impedance to protect the circuitry and the person performing the
test, but low enough to accept currents higher than the allowable values of the LEAKAGE
CURRENT to be measured.
WARNING Shock hazard. The following step causes high voltage at the test body. Do
not touch the test body.
NOTE: Perform this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors
(1) Configure the safety analyzer as follows:
(4) Configure the safety analyzer as follows:
(7) Repeat this test for all the connected parameter modules and patient connectors

3-11

2.8 Test completion

(1) Disconnect the safety analyzer from the power outlet.
(2) Disconnect the test equipment from the patient monitor.
(3) Disconnect the patient monitor’s power cord from the leakage tester.
(4) Fill in all necessary documents.
3-12

Installation checkout
3 Installation checkout
The purpose of the installation checkout procedure is to ensure that the system is properly
installed and configured for use.
Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure for the monitoring system
after the hardware installation and service configuration is completed:
1. 3.1. Visual inspection
2. 2. Electrical Safety Tests
3. 3.2. Functional inspection
Skip the tests that are not applicable for the installed monitor.
These instructions include a "Installation and checkout form, B40i" on page C-1 to be filled in
when performing the procedures.
3.1 Visual inspection

Perform the following visual inspection to the installed monitoring system:
• Carefully inspect the patient monitor for any damage.
• Verify that the patient monitor is properly mounted with specified mounting solutions.
• Verify that the cables between the patient monitor and the connected peripheral devices
are intact and properly connected to the right connectors.
• Verify that the modules are properly connected and locked in place.
• Verify that the battery door is properly locked.
The cleaning precautions, cleaning requirements, cleaning procedures, and recommended
cleaning solutions for the monitor are described in the "User’s Guide". For details about
cleaning, disinfecting and sterilizing the accessories, see the instructions for use in the
accessory package.
3.2 Functional inspection

3.2.1 Start-up
1. Turn on the patient monitor.
Verify that the monitor starts up normally:
• The red, yellow and cyan alarm lights are lit in sequence.
• The speaker gives an audible beep.
• Check that the GE logo screen is displayed, followed by the notes screen and the
normal monitoring screen appears.
• Check and there are no error messages on the screen.
NOTE: Refer to section "Condition the battery" to see the procedure for battery conditioning if
you receive a a Condition Battery X message.
NOTE: Before taking the patient monitor into use for the first time, the battery should be fully
charged. Keep the monitor connected to the mains until the battery is fully charged.

3-13

3.2.2 Display
1. Verify that all text is readable and all images are clear.
2. Verify that the brightness is good. Adjust if necessary.

3.2.3 Time and date
1. Check that the clock on the screen shows correct time. Adjust the time and date, if
necessary.
Monitor Setup < Time and Date
NOTE: The B40i can’t be set as the TIME MASTER in network. You should adjust the time
and date from the central station.

3.2.4 Parameters measurements
Connect the accessories (no need to connect simulator/patient), check the monitor displays the
following messages or activities.
• ECG: After connecting ECG cable, ‘leads off’ will display in the Waveform Field
• NIBP: After connecting NIBP hose to module, ‘Adult/Pediatric’ or ‘Neonatal’ will display in
NIBP Digital Field for several seconds
• SpO2: After connecting SpO2 cable and sensor, SpO2 sensor will be lit.
• Temperature: After connecting Temp cable and sensor, ‘Performing temp test:’ will display
in Temp Digital Field for several seconds.
• IBP: After connecting IBP cable and transducer, ‘InvBP’s not Zeroed’ will display in
Message Field.
• Gas: After installing the gas module, ‘Calibrating gas sensor’ will display in CO2 waveform
field for about 1 minutes.
• Entropy: After installing the E-Entropy module and cable, 'No sensor' message will display
in Entropy digital field.

3.2.5 Recorder
1. Press the Recorder Start/Stop key and check that the module starts recording the
selected waveforms. Press the Recorder Start/Stop key again to stop recording.
2. Check that the quality of the recordings is acceptable.

3.2.6 MC or S/5 Network connection
NOTE: Pre-configure the network when install the monitor.
3-14

Installation checkout
1. Check that the CAT-5 cable connector is clean and intact, then connect it to the Network
connector on the backside of the monitor.
Check that the monitor connects to the network, i.e. the network symbol appears on the
upper right-hand corner of the screen.

3.2.7 Conclusion
• Power off the monitor
• Perform final cleaning
• Fill in all necessary documents, refer to "Installation and checkout form, B40i" on page C-1
3-15

4 Maintenance and checkout

These instructions include procedures for maintenance and checkout for the B40i.
Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure every 12 months after
installation:
1. 4.1. Visual inspection
2. 2. Electrical Safety Tests
3. 4.2. Functional inspection
4. 4.3. Monitor battery maintenance
Skip the tests that are not applicable for the installed monitor.
These instructions include "Maintenance and checkout form, B40i" on page D-1, which to be
filled in when performing the corresponding procedures.
Before starting
• Save the patient data and monitor settings if necessary.
• Make sure that the monitor is turned off.
• Disconnect the mains power cord.
• If the monitor is connected to the network, disconnect the CAT-5 cable from the monitor.

Perform the following visual inspection to the installed monitoring system:
• Carefully inspect the patient monitor for any damage.
• Verify that the patient monitor is properly mounted with specified mounting solutions.
• Verify that the cables between the patient monitor and the connected peripheral devices
are intact and properly connected to the right connectors.
• Verify that the modules are properly connected and locked in place.
• Verify that the battery door is properly locked.
accessory package.

4.2 Functional inspection
4.2.1 Start-up
1. Turn on the patient monitor.
Verify that the monitor starts up normally:
• The red, yellow and cyan alarm lights are lit in sequence.
• The speaker gives an audible beep.
3-16

Maintenance and checkout
• Check that the GE logo screen is displayed, followed by the notes screen and the
normal monitoring screen appears.
• Check and there are no error messages on the screen.
NOTE: Refer to section "Condition the battery" on page 3-23 to see the procedure for battery
conditioning if you receive a a Condition Battery X message.
NOTE: Batteries are recommended to be conditioned every six months.

4.2.2 Display
1. Verify that all text is readable and all images are clear.
2. Verify that the brightness is good. Adjust if necessary.

4.2.3 Keyboard(s)
1. Tests with the keyboard/membrane switch:
− Enter the service menu:
Monitor Setup < Install/Service (16-4-34) < Service (password 26-23-8) -
Keyboard
− Check the keys one by one, turn trim knob one full turn clockwise and one full turn
counter clockwise.

4.2.4 Time and date
1. Check that the clock on the screen shows correct time. Adjust the time and date, if
necessary.
Monitor Setup < Time and Date
NOTE: The B40i can’t be set as the TIME MASTER in network. You should adjust the time
and date from the central station.

4.2.5 Hemo Module
ECG measurement
• Configure ECG settings in monitor:
Connect 5 lead ECG cable to monitor and simulator.
Monitor Setup < Screen Setup < Waveform Fields < Field 1: ECG1; Field 2: ECG2;
Field 3: ECG3
ECG < ECG1 Lead: II; ECG2 Lead: V1; ECG3 Lead: aVL; ECG Size: 1.0
< ECG Setup < Beat Sound Volume: 1 or greater; Pacemaker: Show; HR Source: AUTO
• Configure ECG settings in simulator:
ECG rhythm: a normal sinus rhythm
3-17

heart rate: 80 bpm

Amplitude: 1 mV
1. Normal Sinus Rhythm
− Check that the monitor displays the ECG leads II, V1 & aVL and the waveforms are
noise-free. The monitor shall display a 80 ± 5 bpm heart rate and an audible QRS
tone sounds with each QRS complex.

2. Pacemaker Detection
− Configure the simulator to output "Asynchronous Pacemaker Pulse"
− Check that pacemaker spikes are shown on the ECG waveform.

3. Asystole Detection
− Configure the simulator to output "Asystole".
− Check that the 'Asystole' alarm appears to the monitor screen.
− Configure the simulator to show "80 beats per minute, Normal Sinus Rhythm".

4. Leads Off Detection
− Detach the RA/R leadwire from the simulator.
− Check that the Lead II waveform disappears from the ECG1 waveform field and a
message 'RA/R lead off'' is shown momentarily.
− Check that Lead II is replaced by Lead III in the ECG1 waveform field after a while
and a message 'Lead changed' is followed by a message 'Learning'.
− Reconnect the RA/R leadwire to the simulator.
− Check that Lead III is replaced back to Lead II in the ECG waveform field.

Respiration measurement
• Configure RESP settings in monitor:
Set up the Resp waveform field to the monitor screen:
Monitor Setup < Screen Setup < Waveform Fields < Field 4: Resp
And
Others < RespSetup < Resp Rate Source: Imped.
< Measurement: ON
• Configure RESP settings in simulator:
Baseline impedance: 1000
Amplitude: 1
Respiration rate: 20 breaths per minute
Lead selection: II (or LL)
5. Respiration Rate
− Check that the RESP waveform is shown and the RR value is 20 (±5).
− Configure the simulator's Apnea Simulation to "32 sec".
3-18


6. Apnea Detection
− Check that the monitor activates the Apnea alarm.
− Configure the simulator's Apnea Simulation to "OFF"

Temperature measurement
• Configure the “T1+T2” digit field to the monitor screen.
• Configure the simulator’s temperature channels as follows:
Temperature : 37 °C/98.6 °F
7. Temperature detection
− Check the corresponding temperature value appears and that no error messages
are shown on the monitor screen.
NOTE: If the deviation on a temperature reading on the screen is more than 0.1°C,
calibrate the temperature channels according to the instructions in chapter
"Temperature calibration" on page 3-25.

Invasive blood pressure measurement
• Configure the simulator’s IBP channels as follows:
Sensitivity: 5 µV/V/mmHg
InvBP outputs: "0 mmHg static pressure" or "atmosphere"
8. Zeroing
− Press IBP Zero All key.
− Check that a message "Zeroing" followed by a message "Zeroed" is shown in the IBP
parameter window.

9. Static Pressure
− Configure the simulator's InvBP output to "200 mmHg static pressure".
− Check that the flat pressure line appears on the related waveform field. The reading
in the parameter window shall be 200 ±10 mmHg.
NOTE: Recalibration is required, if the measured value is not within the specification.
Calibrate the invasive pressure channels according to the instructions in "Invasive
pressure calibration" on page 3-26.

10. Pressure Waveforms
− Configure the simulator's InvBP output to "Arterial 120/80".
− Check that the pressure waveform for tested invasive pressure channel appears in
the IBP waveform field and the Sys/Dia (Mean) pressure values are shown in the
related parameter window.
3-19


SpO2 measurement
11. Test measurement
Connect the SpO2 probe onto your finger. Check that the reading of 90-100 and SpO2
waveform appears. Check that the HR value is calculated from SpO2 when ECG and InvBP
(ABP or Art) are not measured.
NOTE: a functional tester cannot be used to assess the accuracy of a pulse oximeter probe or a
pulse oximeter monitor

Non Invasive Blood Pressure measurement
• Connect and set up the NIBP integrated tool as following picture, ensure all the
connections made are leak-proof.
12. NIBP Leak Test

− Enter the NIBP Calibration in service menu:
Parameters < NIBP < Calibrations
− Select Active Leak Test: ON
− Wait for 15 seconds for the pressure to stabilize then check that the pressure does
not drop more than 5 mmHg per one minute.

13. NIBP calibration
− Calibrate the Non-invasive blood pressure (NIBP) channel according to the
instructions in "NIBP calibrations" on page 3-24.

14. NIBP hose detection
− Disconnect the calibration test equipment.
3-20

− Make sure NIBP Setup - Inflation Limits is set to Auto.

− Attach an A/P NIBP cuff hose without cuff identification.
− Press the NIBP Start/Cancel key. After a few moments the monitor automatically
opens the selections NIBP Setup - Inflation Limits for user to manually select the
inflation limits.

4.2.6 Loudspeaker
Check the loudspeaker by setting the alarm volume:
Alarms Setup < Alarm Volume
Test the whole volume scale from 1 to 10 by turning the Trim Knob and check that the
alarm volume changes correspondingly. The alarm sound should be clear and audible
with all the settings.

4.2.7 Monitor software
Enter the service menu:
Monitor Setup < Install Service (16-4-34) < Service (26-23-8)
Take down the information regarding Monitor software.

4.2.8 Watchdog circuitry
Select:
Monitor Setup < Install Service (16-4-34) < Service (26-23-8) < Set/Test
Perform the tests Watchdog and WD by Overload. Check that the monitor restarts in
each case.
NOTE: When selecting Watchdog and WD by Overload, auto restarting should take place
approximately after 10 seconds.

4.2.9 Network
NOTE: Pre-configure the network when install the monitor.
1. Check that the CAT-5 cable connector is clean and intact, then connect it to the Network
connector on the backside of the monitor.
Check that the monitor connects to the network, i.e. the network symbol appears on the
upper right-hand corner of the screen.
3-21

4.2.10 Final cleaning

Switch off the monitor and perform final cleaning.
Fill in all necessary documents, refer to "Maintenance and checkout form, B40i" on
page D-1.

4.3 Monitor battery maintenance
The lithium-ion (Li-Ion) battery is a rechargeable battery containing lithium-ion cells. Each
battery contains an integrated electronic fuel gauge and a safety protection circuit.
The following are facts about lithium-ion battery technology:
• The battery discharges on its own, even when it is not installed in the equipment. This
discharge is the result of the lithium-ion cells and the bias current required for the
integrated electronics.
• The capacity loss of the battery degrades significantly at higher temperatures.
• As the battery ages, the full-charge capacity of the battery degrades and is permanently
lost. As a result, the amount of charge that is stored and available for use is reduced.
4.3.1 Use recommendations

GE recommends the following methods to improve battery performance:
− Location — Position the equipment in a location that does not artificially increase the
operating temperature of the batteries.
− Conditioning guideline — Condition the battery when a ‘Condition Battery X’ message is
shown on the monitor screen. The condition cycle recalibrates the electronic fuel gauge.
4.3.2 Storage recommendations

GE recommends storing the battery outside of the device at a temperature between 20°C to
25°C (68°F to 77°F).
4.3.3 Test the battery charge

Before installing a battery, verify the battery’s state of charge. Press the green TEST button on
the battery. The number of charge level indicator LEDs that illuminate indicates the
approximate charge remaining in the battery.
− Four LEDs illuminated: 75% – 100% of full-charge capacity.
− Three LEDs illuminated: 50% – 74.9% of full-charge capacity.
− Two LEDs illuminated: 25% – 49.9% of full-charge capacity.
− One LED illuminated: 10% – 24.9% of full-charge capacity.
− One LED flashing: < 10% of full-charge capacity remaining.
4.3.4 Charge the battery

The battery charges whenever it is installed into the patient monitor and the patient monitor is
connected to an AC power source.
The battery is charging both when the patient monitor is turned on and turn off. Battery is
charging as long as the orange battery charging indicator LED is lit.
3-22

4.3.5 Condition the battery

Battery conditioning is needed if the ‘Condition Battery X’ message is displayed.
Condition the battery by fully discharging and recharging the battery twice according to the
following procedure:
NOTE: The patient monitor must be in a discharged state during battery conditioning.
Disconnect any acquisition modules from the patient monitor if connected.
1. Turn on the patient monitor. Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet. Leave the
patient monitor on until the battery is fully discharged and the patient monitor turns off
automatically.
NOTE: Ignore the ‘Battery Low’ and ‘Battery Empty’ messages when discharging the battery.
2. Reconnect the power cord to the wall outlet and turn on the patient monitor. Leave the
patient monitor on until the battery is fully recharged and the orange battery charging
indicator LED turns off.
3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 once.
The battery is now conditioned and ready for use. However if the ‘Condition Battery X’
message is still shown on the screen, replace the battery.
4.3.6 Replace the battery

Replace the battery in the following situations:
− If the ‘Replace Battery X’ message is displayed. This message indicates that the
full-charge capacity of the used battery has considerably degraded compared to the
design capacity of a new battery.
Remove the battery from the monitor and install a new battery according to the procedure in
section "Installing the batteries" on page 2-3.
NOTE: Dispose of the battery according to local, state or country laws.
WARNING Do not incinerate the battery or store at high temperatures.
NOTE: Refer to section "Battery indicators" on page 4-6 for more detailed information about the
battery status.
3-23

5 Adjustments and calibrations

NOTE: Use only properly maintained, calibrated and traceable measurement equipment for the
specified calibrations and adjustments to ensure accuracy.
NOTE: Discharge the patient before do the following procedures.
5.1 NIBP calibrations

NIBP calibration should be performed:
• Each time planned maintenance is performed.
• Each time corrective maintenance is performed.
• If the measured value is not within the specification.
Calibration check
• Refer to the "Non Invasive Blood Pressure measurement" on page 3-20 in maintenance
checkout section for NIBP integrated tool set up.
1. Enter Calibration menu:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) -Service (26-23-8) - Parameters -
NIBP - Calibrations
Calibration
Active Leak Test OFF
Calibration Check OFF
Protection OFF
Calibrate
Previous Menu
2. Select Calibration Check and push the Trim Knob.

3. Connect an external precision manometer to the monitor, the same as "Non Invasive
Blood Pressure measurement" on page 3-20.
4. Pump the following pressures to manometer and check the difference between the
manometer and monitor pressure display (The zeroing offset is automatically subtracted
from the pressure readings).
Table 3 NIBP calibration check pressures
Pressure Max. error Example

0 mmHg ±5 mmHg (=zero offset) -1
100 mmHg 100 ±2 mmHg 100 ±2
200 mmHg 200 ±3 mmHg 200 ±3
3-24

Adjustments and calibrations
There is a reading of B1 and B2 in help filed under NIBP calibration menu. If the error of
pressure channel B1 and B2 is larger than specified above, the module should be recalibrated.
The error of B2 has no effect on blood pressure measurement accuracy.
NOTE: If the monitor pass the calibration check, no need to do NIBP calibration.
Calibration
1. Enter Calibration menu.
2. Disconnect the hoses from the NIBP connector to enable proper zeroing.
3. Select Calibrate. If it is not available, perform the steps a and b.
a. Select Protection OFF in the Calibration menu and push the Trim Knob.
b. Menu selection Calibrate is now enabled.
• Start calibration by pushing the Trim Knob. Messages ‘Zeroing’ and ‘Zeroed’ will be
displayed in the NIBP message field.
• Connect an external manometer with a pump to the module through the both tubes of
the hose - both transducers B1 and B2 will be calibrated simultaneously. Pump up to a
pressure of about 200 mmHg according to the manometer. Calibration is possible in the
range of 150 to 250 mmHg.
• Verify that both pressure values in the prompt field match the manometer reading. If not,
adjust by turning the Trim Knob. When the values of the pressure bar and the manometer
are equal, push the Trim Knob to confirm the calibration. The message ‘Calibrating’ and
‘Calibrated’ will be displayed on the NIBP digit field after a few seconds.
• To set the protection on:
Select Protection ON and push the Trim Knob.
NOTE: If a long time not choose ON manually, this menu will automatically return to
Protection ON.
5.2 Temperature calibration

Temperature calibration should be performed:
• If the temperature test values differ for more than 0.1 °C.
• After STP/TP board replacement.
1. Connect the TEMP accessories to the monitor, use P/N 884515-HEL Temperature
calibration plugs
2. Enter STP Module service menu.
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8) -
Parameters - STP.
3. Enter Calibrations menu.
4. Choose Protection OFF in protect mode.
5. Select Calibrate T1/Calibrate T2.
6. Insert calibration plug (25 °C) into T1/T2 connector.
7. Push the Trim Knob.
8. Insert calibration plug (45 °C) into T1/T2 connector.
9. Push the Trim Knob.
• Check Protection ON in protect mode.
Protection ON.
3-25

5.3 Invasive pressure calibration

IBP calibration should be performed:
• When the pressure transducer (probe) is replaced with a different type of transducer.
• When the measured value is not in the acceptable specification.
• After STP board replacement.
NOTE: Before starting invasive pressure calibration, disconnect all patient cables and discharge
the patient.
There are two methods to complete the calibration as following:
Using a transducer
1. Connect the IBP accessories to the monitor, use a pressure manometer with a pressure
pump
2. Enter STP service menu.
Parameters - STP.
5. Connect a pressure transducer with a pressure manometer to the P1/P2 connector.
Choose Calibrate P1 or Calibrate P2. Leave the transducer to room air pressure.
6. Push the Trim Knob to start zeroing.
7. Supply a pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the transducer. The recommended
pressure is 200 mmHg.
8. Set the pressure on the display to match the pressure reading on the manometer and
push the Trim Knob. A tolerance of ±1 mmHg is allowed.
9. The message ‘Calibrated’ will be displayed on the display.
• Check Protection ON in protect mode.
Protection ON.
3-26

Adjustments and calibrations
Using a simulator
1. Connect the IBP accessories to the monitor and simulator.
2. Enter STP service menu.
Parameters - STP.
5. Choose Calibrate P1 or Calibrate P2. Set the P1 or P2 channel to 0 mmHg on the
simulator.
6. Push the Trim Knob to start zeroing.
7. Set a pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg on the simulator. The recommended pressure
is 200 mmHg.
8. Set the pressure on the display to match the pressure reading on the simulator and push
the Trim Knob. A tolerance of ±1 mmHg is allowed.
9. The message ‘Calibrated’ will be displayed on the display.
10. Check Protection ON in protect mode.
3-27

3-28

4 Troubleshooting
Introduction
1 Introduction
The problems and solutions in this section represent only a few of the faults that you may
encounter and are not intended to cover every possible problem that may occur.
This chapter focuses on troubleshooting technical problems. For clinical and operation issues
refer to the "User’s Guide" for troubleshooting.
NOTE: For the Gas modules troubleshooting, please refer to “9. E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO
Modules“.
NOTE: For the Entropy module troubleshooting, please refer to “10. E-Entropy Module“.
If the problem remains, call technical support for service. To ensure accurate problem solving,
please be prepared to provide the following information:
• Problem description and the troubleshooting done so far.
• Device information.
• Error messages displayed, if any.
• Other information, as requested.

Before beginning any detailed troubleshooting, complete a thorough visual inspection to be
sure that:
• There is no physical damage.
• The patient monitor is properly powered.
• No incompatible parts or devices used. Refer to “Supplies and accessories” for list of
compatible devices.
If loose parts or cable connections inside the monitor are suspected, disassemble the patient
monitor to a level needed to perform an internal visual check. Check that:
• all screws are tightened properly
• all cables are connected properly
• there are no loose objects inside the monitor
NOTE: Perform the electrical safety test and the checkout procedure every time you have
disassembled the patient monitor.
4-1

1.2 General troubleshooting

Disconnect the mains power cord and
No picture on screen
remove the batteries.
Check the batteries charging

Connect the mains
levels by pressing the test
power cord
buttons on the batteries.
Insert only one battery with 2 or

more capacity leds illuminating.
Front panel green Press the ON/OFF key.
No Replace fuses
mains power LED lit?
Power board SW Front panel green

Yes
functioning battery LED lit?
Yes
Mains power
LED lit?
No
No
Yes
Disconnect the mains
Possible AC/DC unit
power cord and batteries.
failure. Replace the Power board failure
Reconnect and press the
AC/DC unit.
ON/OFF key.
Yes
Mains power
No
LED lit?
Wait for about 1 minute

Normal start-up sound
and press the NIBP auto
and the alarm LEDs turn Yes
on and off? ON/OFF key, NOTE: NIBP
cuff must be connected
NIBP pump starts

pumping and connected Main CPU board may be
No
No
SpO2 probe, Is SpO2 faulty.

probe red LED lit?
Yes
Possible key board or CPU Display failure. See Frame

failure. See Frame troubleshooting in this
troubleshooting in this chapter. chapter.
4-2

Introduction
1.3 Software troubleshooting chart
Start-up with GE
logo image?
Yes
Check the software CD whether

Turn off the monitor. can run in the PC normally and
Download the software from
try to download the SW again.
software CD onto the CPU
board. No
NOTE: Refer to Software
download instruction in CD.
OK?
Turn the power on.
No
Try with another
Wait for 120 software CD to
seconds. No download again. Please
read the note below.
Start-up display
No
appears?
OK? Yes
Yes
No
Has the information

regarding monitor software Replace the CPU
been updated on the board and try again. Yes
Service View?
Yes
Perform factory reset.
NOTE:
The software CD may be
defective.
4-3

2 Frame troubleshooting
Problem Cause What to do
Monitor is not starting. 1. The batteries are empty. 1. Connect the power cord.
2. Fuses may be blown. 2. Replace fuses.
3. If power cord connected, AC/DC 3. Replace the AC/DC power unit.
unit may be faulty.
4. If AC/DC unit is working, the 4. Replace the power board unit.
power board may be faulty.
5. On/Stby key may be faulty. 5. Replace the keyboard/membrane
switch panel or the
interconnection cable.
Monitor is not starting. 1. The connection between power 1. Check connection between power
board and CPU board may be board and CPU board.
faulty.
2. Faulty CPU board. 2. Replace the CPU board.
The monitor starts (alarm beep 1. The display cables are loose. 1. Check the display connection
is heard), but the display board connectors.
remains black. 2. The backlights are not lit. 2. Check inverter cable.
Backlight Inverter may be faulty.
Replace the Inverter board.
Display and monitor operating 1. Loudspeaker connector or wires 1. Check loudspeaker connector and
but no audible beep in start-up. loose or faulty. wires.
Display is too dim. 1. Incorrect brightness adjustment. 1. Adjust display brightness higher.
2. Backlight faulty. 2. Check inverter cable.
3. Backlight inverter faulty. 3. Replace backlight.
Stripes or white areas on screen. 1. Loose faulty display connection 1. Check display connection cable in
cable in CPU and display. CPU and display.
Module data disappears from Parameter module current (in Detach and change parameter
the screen. ‘Module power module bus) too high. module.
supply overload’ message.
Module data disappears. 1. Module bus voltage or signals 1. Replace module interface board.
path broken. 2. Replace the cable between
module interface board and
Power board.
3. Change the parameter module.
‘Replace Battery’ message on 1. Problem in communication 1. Replace battery.
the screen. between battery and power
board.
2. Battery too old or defected. 2. Replace battery.
3. power board may be faulty. 3. Replace the power board.
4. Problem in communication
between power board and CPU
'Frame temperature high' The temperature inside the frame is Check monitor ventilation holes.
message. too high.
‘Battery temperature high’ Battery SMBus temperature is too Check monitor ventilation holes.
message on the screen. high. Replace battery.
4-4

Frame troubleshooting

Keyboard not working, but Keyboard cables and connectors 1. Check the keyboard/membrane
module communication is OK. may be faulty. switch connection to the user
interface board.
2. Check the interconnection cable
between user interface board and
battery board.
Keyboard not working, and UPI section of the CPU board not Restart the monitor.
module communication not functioning normally. Replace the CPU Board.
working.
Keyboard partly not working. 1. Keyboard/membrane switch 1. Check the interconnection cable
faulty. between user interface board and
2. Keyboard cables and connectors battery board.
may be faulty. 2. Check the keyboard/membrane
switch connection to the user
interface board.
3. Replace the keyboard/membrane
switch.
4-5

2.1 Battery indicators

The B40i messages, screen symbols and the LED indicators tell the user about the status of the
batteries.
The Green main LED will indicate that monitor is powered by Main. The Green battery LED will
indicate that monitor is powered by battery. The Orange battery LED lit will indicate that the
battery is in charging. The Orange battery LED flashing will indicate that the battery is defect. If
the battery is fully charged and it’s main powered. the orange and Green battery LED will both
dark.
Table 4 Battery indicators
Screen symbol Explanation Front panel battery LED

indicators
Monitor is battery Orange dark
A
B B powered. Batteries are Green lit
fully charged and the
size of the green bar
indicates the charging
level.
B
Monitor is battery Orange dark

powered. Battery A is Green lit
A B empty, battery B is ok.
Monitor is battery Orange flashing

powered. Battery A Green lit
B failure, battery B is ok.
NOTE: If both batteries fail, the green battery LED is dark.

Monitor is mains Orange lit
powered. Battery A is Green dark
being charged (white
bar), battery B is already
charged.
Monitor is mains Orange dark
no screen symbol powered. Green dark
4-6

Frame troubleshooting
2.2 NET section troubleshooting

Monitor does not connect to Patch panel Patch cable not connected to HUB or to panel.
the network.
Patch cable Patch cable or connector defective.
Monitor connects to the
network, but disconnects HUB not connected to power supply.
unexpectedly (‘Network HUB port closed due to physical layer problems.
down: central station’
message on the monitor HUB port temporarily closed and reopened due
screen). to physical layer problems.
HUBs not properly connected to each other.
Monitor-Network cable Cable not properly connected to the wallplate
or to the monitor.
Cable or connector defective.
Network cable (inside the Replace the Network cable - in FRU
monitor) defective 2053489-004.
External interface board Replace the External interface board - in FRU
defective 2053489-004.
Net section of the CPU board The NET section is defective. Replace the CPU
board.
NET section memory on the The SDRAM of the NET section is defective or
CPU board uninitialized. The NET cannot be used. See
network service page for details.
‘Check network connectors’ Monitor-Network cable Cable not properly connected to the wallplate
message shows on the or to the monitor.
monitor screen Cable or connector defective.
Network cable (inside the Replace the Network cable - in FRU
monitor) defective 2053489-004.
External interface board Replace the External interface board - in FRU
defective 2053489-004.
Didn’t properly set up “virtual Set up the virtual plug id in monitor.
plug id“
Network printing fails Print server is busy Network manager's print server is busy at the
moment and cannot take more print jobs. Try
again after 15 seconds.
Print queue is full There are too many unprinted documents
waiting in the print queue. Check the printer, as
it is not operating properly.
Printer is off-line Printer cable is loose, printer is out of paper,
there is a paper jam or the printer is simply
switched to off-line state.
4-7


No vitial signs data send to No HL7 license Check about the HL7 license
EMR system
HL7 configuration error • Check HL7 configuration for vitial signs
receiver IP and port.
• Check HL7 Status view menu
The vitial sign receiver system Check the Service Log, if have “AR” or “AE”
have error or reject to receive. message from vitial sign receiver system, this is
the receiver system’s issue.
4-8

Hemo Troubleshooting
3 Hemo Troubleshooting
3.1 NIBP troubleshooting flowchart
NIBP module not
working
Insert Hemo
module to a good
monitor
Check the module interface

board; the cable between
Is it OK? Yes
module interface board and
power board in the frame
No
Remove the cover of

Hemo module (connect the
module to monitor, then
power on)
Green LED on Replace the flex

Yes
NIBP board lit? module bus
No
NIBP
Replace NIBP
No parameter display
board
on the screen?
Yes
Check if NIBP
NIBP Cuff loose connector spring
ENd Yes Start NIBP
function well? message appears No contact well with
without hose
on screen? the button of cuff
ID board
Yes
Leak test in Check tubes

Service Menu No connectors and
OK? manifold
No
Pump check
Check pump
in Service Menu No
connector.
OK?
See error code

explanation in
No
service manual
and fix it
NOTE: Please refer to 5.4. NIBP Module in Chapter 5 for Service Menu instruction.
4-9

3.2 ECG troubleshooting flowchart
ECG module not

working
Does NIBP
Refer to NIBP
module work No
flowcharts
well?
Yes
Replace ECG
board
Replace the flex

ECG parameter module cable. Or
No
display on screen? remove STP board
(STP board may faulty)
Yes
ECG function
No End
well?
No
Check ECG input

connector, ECG input
board and ECG input
flex cable
4-10

3.3 STP troubleshooting flowchart

STP module not
working
Does NIBP
Refer to NIBP
module work No
flowcharts
well?
Yes
Go to service
menu
Is STP parameter
Select the right
configuration No
configuration
correct?
Yes
Replace STP/TP
board
Replace the flex module

STP/TP parameter cable. Or remove ECG
No
display on screen? board from the flex
module cable.
Yes
Check STP input

Temp/IBP
No board, STP/TP input
function well?
flex cable.
Yes
Check STP input board,

STP/TP input flex cable.
SpO2 function
No Check Masimo/Nellcor
well?
SpO2 board connect on the
TP board well.
Yes
End
4-11

3.4 NIBP
3.4.1 NIBP toubleshooting

No NIBP value displayed NIBP not selected on screen. Check monitor setup.
‘Weak pulsation’ message Weak or unstable oscillation pulses Check patient condition and retry.
due to: Check any leaks and retry.
• artifacts Use proper size of cuff. Check
attachment.
• weak pulse pressure due to
arrhythmias
• improper cuff position or
attachment
• too few pulses detected
• weak or unusual blood
circulation
• obese patient
Call service NIBP hardware error. See 3.4.2. NIBP error code explanation
‘Error X’ message X = error number. for the description of the error message
code.
‘Cuff loose’ message 1. Hose and/or cuff not connected. 1. Connect the hose and the cuff.
2. Hose and cuff connected.
Reasons:
- cuff loosely wrapped - Tighten the cuff.
- leakage inside the shield, in the - Check the tubings inside the shield
Patient connector panel or and Patient connector panel, fix if
tubings connecting to the necessary.
module
- leakage in cuff or hose - Replace cuff/hose.
- leakage inside module - Check internal tubing and fix if
necessary.
- pump does not work - Check pump connector; if OK,
replace the NIBP Pump Unit.
4-12


Air leakage 1. Hose or cuff leaking. Reasons: 1. Replace cuff
- cuff damaged - Replace cuff.
- cuff connector damaged - Replace cuff connector (if the fault is
in hose connector).
- O-ring damaged or missing - Replace O-ring.
- hose double connector damaged - Replace NIBP cuff hose.
2. Hose and cuff OK. Reasons: 2. Connect or replace tube
- leakage in the tubes connecting - Check the tubes.
the patient connector panel and
the module
- leakage inside the module - Replace the whole tubing.
- tube disconnected or damaged - Fix connections.
- manifold leaking - Replace the manifold.
- tubes or valve(s) damaged - Replace tubes/valve(s).
‘Cuff occlusion’ message 1. Cuff and/or hose occluded.
Reason:
- cuff tube kinked - Straighten tube.
- tubes inside the shield kinked - Straighten tubes.
- tubes inside module kinked - Straighten tubes.
- occlusion inside/outside module - Remove occlusion.
2. Cuff, hose, and tubes OK.
Reason:
- fault in pressure transducer - Replace the NIBP board.
- fault in A/D converter - Replace the NIBP board.
- faulty calibration - Check calibration.
4-13

3.4.2 NIBP error code explanation

Code Problem What to do
0 RAM test failure Change the NIBP board.
1 ROM checksum failure Change the NIBP board.
2 Pump on during idle or over current detected Check short circuits. Change the NIBP board.
3 Startup communication failure with safety CPU Change the NIBP board.
4 EEPROM protection is off Protect calibration by selecting Protection ON in
the NIBP calibration menu.
5 EEPROM read/write error Change the NIBP board.
6 Valve stuck closed during cuff typing Try to remeasure. If the problem persists,
recalibrate. If the problem still persists, change
the NIPB board.
7 Could not save calibration data Reset the module and recalibrate. If this does not
help, change the NIBP board.
8 PT2 higher than 150 for greater than 15 seconds Check short circuits. Change the NIBP board.
while idle
9 Determination time too long Automatic recovery.
10 RTK 400Hz timer re-entry Change the NIBP board.
11 RTK 50Hz timer re-entry Change the NIBP board.
12 Not in use Not in use.
13 RTK overrun Change the NIBP board.
14 Too early AUTO START according to module Reset the monitor.
check
15 Calibration data invalid on initialization or unit Recalibrate. If this does not help, change the
never calibrated NIBP board.
16 Communication timeout between main and Check short circuits. Change the NIBP board.
safety CPU
17 Safety CPU report communication timeout Check short circuits. Change the NIBP board.
18 Wrong message rate in communication between Check short circuits. Change the NIBP board.
main and safety CPU ><+2% (480 msg/s)
4-14

3.5 ECG
HR numerical display No heart rate available. If no ECG waveform, check LEADS OFF
shows ‘---’ message and connect the leads.
If ECG waveform exists, check heart rate
source e.g. in the ECG Setup menu behind
ECG key.
Unacceptable ECG Poor electrode or poor electrode skin Electrodes from different manufacturers
waveform contact. are used. /Too much/little gel is used.
Poor electrode condition. Electrodes are dried out.
Improper site of electrodes. Check that electrodes are not placed over
bones, active muscles, or layers of fat.
Improper skin preparation. Remove body hair. Clean attachment site
carefully with alcohol.
Improper bandwidth filter. Check filter.
Dirty ECG cable. Clean the cable.
Faulty ECG cable Change the cable.
No ECG trace Waveform not selected on screen. Press the Monitor Setup key and make
adjustments.
Module not plugged in correctly. Check the hemo module’s installation.
Noise-message High frequency or 50/60 Hz noise. Isolate noise source.
4-15

3.6 Impedance respiration

No resp trace Waveform not selected on the screen Press the Monitor Setup key and
make adjustments.
Module not plugged in correctly Check the hemo module’s installation.
Unacceptable resp Poor electrode or poor electrode skin Electrodes from different
waveform contact manufacturers are used. Too
much/little gel is used.
Poor electrode condition Electrodes are dried out.
Improper site of electrodes Check that electrodes are not placed
over bones, active muscles, or layers of
fat.
Improper skin preparation Remove body hair. Clean attachment
site carefully with alcohol.
Faulty/ dirty ECG cable. Change new cable.
APNEA message, and Respiration source is CO2 Check respiration source and change it
respiration waveform to correct one.
normal
4-16

3.7 Pulse oximetry (SpO2)

Message ‘NO PROBE’ No sensor connected to the module Check sensor connections.
SpO2 connector.
Sensor faulty. Change the sensor.
The type of sensor incorrect. Change the sensor.
Flat cable connecting the SpO2 Check the Flat cable, replace if
connector to the STP board loosen or necessary.
broken.
Message ‘PROBE OFF’ Unsuitable site. Try another site.
though sensor properly
Sensor faulty. Try another sensor.
attached to the patient
Sensor connection cable not Connect the cable to sensor.
connected to sensor.
Finger sensor falls off Sensor is slippery. Wipe with 70% isopropyl alcohol and
allow drying.
Finger is too thin or thick. Try other fingers, or other sensor types.
Weak signal artifacts Poor perfusion. Try another place.
Movement artifacts.
Shivering.
Message ‘CHECK PROBE’ Singal quality is too low to perform Check probe condition or try another
SpO2 measurements. sensor.
The monitor’s configuration for SpO2 is Check the monitor’s configuration.
not correct.
Message ‘FAULTY PROBE’ Sensor is faulty. Change the sensor.
The monitor’s configuration for SpO2 is Check the monitor’s configuration.
not correct.
No SpO2 No waveform selected on screen. Check the selected SpO2 waveforms by
pressing Monitor Setup key and
selecting Screen Setup - Waveform
Fields.
Wrong configuration setting. Check the configuration settings from
the STP/Calibrations menu (Monitor
Setup - Install/Service - Service -
Parameters)
4-17

3.8 Temperature
No temperature displayed Wrong type of probe. Use correct probe.
Temperature out of measurable range. The range is between 10 and 45 °C.
Temperature calibration not protected. Set the protection ON in the Service
Menu.
The monitor not configure TEMP. Check the monitor’s configuration.
3.9 Invasive blood pressure

Abnormally low pressure Transducer wrongly positioned. Check mid-heart level and reposition
transducer.
No pressure Defective transducer. Check transducer.
‘Not zeroed’ message No pressure module plugged in. Check the module.
No waveform selected on screen. Check the selected pressure
waveforms by pressing Monitor
Setup key and selecting Screen Setup
- Waveform Fields.
Check that the pressure transducer is
open to the patient.
Wrong configuration setting Check the configuration setting from
the STP/Calibrations menu (Monitor
Setup - Install/Service - Service -
Parameters).
Measurement on, channel not zeroed. Zero the channel.
Invasive pressure Patient case is active Discharge a patient and make sure
calibration is not selectable that the hemo module does not receive
any signals from a simulator.
Out of range < - 40 mmHg Measurement pressure is beyond the Check the transducer level. Zero the
measurement range. channel.
Out of range > 320 mmHg Measurement pressure is beyond the Check the transducer level. Zero the
measurement range. channel. The patient may also have
high pressure.
Out of range Measured pressure is beyond the The waveform hits the top and the
internal measurement range of the numeric display not shown. Check the
module. transducer and its level. Zero the
channel.
4-18

5 Service Menu
Introduction
1 Introduction
The monitor has a Service Menu, which is a useful tool to examine monitor functions and
troubleshoot in case a fault occurs.
1.1 Service Menu structure
Service Menu SW Download
Active Inactive SW
SW management NIBP SW Upgrade
Country Settings Languages
License
Country Settings Languages
Network Config Dri Config

Frame Network TCP/IP Dri Comm
HL7 TCP\IP
Power Supply WPM Battery
Keyboard Keyboard Log

General
Parameters Gas Unit Gases
ECG ECG Setup
STP Calibrations
NIBP Calibrations
Safety Valve
SpO2
Pneumatics
Entropy
Set/Test
Service Log
5-1

1.2 Service Menu

NOTE: The Service Menu pictures are for reference only. Details on the menu page can vary
depending on the software version and the module type in use. If a particular selection is not
available in your system, the selection is shown grayed.
1. Press the Monitor Setup key.

Service Menu Sw version / Unit id
2. Select Install/Service (password 16-4-34).
3. Select Service (password 26-23-8). Main Software ---------------------------------
SW Management
LX/VSP_0.06
Frame
BootStrap software ---------------------------
keyboard B40_BOOTSTRAP_0.6
Parameters UBoot softeware --------------------------------
B40_UBOOT_0.8
Set / Test Linux kernel -----------------------------------
Service Log B40_OS_0.9
File system -----------------------------------------
Scroll Vers
B40_FS_0.6
Record Vers UMBC software ---------------------------------------
B40_UMBC_0.6
Clear Password
CPU serial number: ------------------------------
Previous Menu 92114469
CPU test date: -- code: --- level: ---
2008-09-02 M1008748 06
PMC version --------------------------------------
Scroll Vers
Press Scroll Vers to scroll and view the detail version for monitor and modules on the extension
window.
Record Vers
Press Record Vers to record the detail version for monitor and modules on the extension
window.
Clear Password
The monitor will remember the service menu’s password you first enter. If you not restart the
monitor, the next time you enter to service menu, any random password can get the access.
Press Clear Password to clear the memory of password for service menu. When you next time
enter to service menu, can use other level password for different service menu’s access.
5-2

SW Management
2 SW Management
The SW Management menu includes Software-specific service menus.

SW Management
----------------------------
SW Download
----------------------------
Active Inactive SW
NIBP SW Upgrade ----------------------------
Country Settings ----------------------------

License
----------------------------
----------------------------
Previous Menu
----------------------------
number:-----------------
200
----------------------------
2.1 SW Download
The SW Download submenu show IP Address and enable software download.
IP Address: Show the IP Address of the monitor.

Enable SW Download: Select YES can enable to SW Download
download main software.
IP Address 172.16.1.23
Enable SW Download
Previous Menu
Selecting this enables

Software download
5-3

2.2 Active Inactive SW

The Active Inactive SW submenu allows you to active inactive software.
Activation: Selection of activation can restart
the monitor and change the main software from Activation Soft Active Status
active software to incative software. Active SW
Activation
NOTE: If there is no inactive software in the B20/B40 Software: 0.19-0.6
monitor, the selection is grayed. Previous Menu
Inactive SW
B20/B40 Software: empty
2.3 NIBP SW Upgrade

This submenu is used for NIBP firmware upgrade.
Current Version: to show the NIBP firmware current version.

Upgrade Version: to show the NIBP firmware upgrade version.
NIBP SW Upgrade
SW Upgrade: after you download the new file system file, use Current Version NA
this menu to activate the new version of NIBP software. NA
Upgrade Version
SW Upgrade
Previous Menu
Return to previous menu
5-4

SW Management
2.4 Country Settings

The Country Settings submenu can be refered to 3.1. Country Settings.
2.5 License
The license submenu is used to set up monitor configuration for features.
MAC Address: Show MAC address for this monitor, this item is
fixed, can’t be selected. License
License key: Show License key, this item can’t be selected.
MAC Address 0425FEED0107
Produce type, IBP, OCRG, TEMP, ST, SpO2, Network are the
monitor’s configuration which to be setup. These menus need a Licence key
license key to open access.
Product type B40i
Enter key: To enter the license key to open access for setup
IBP
configuration.
OCRG
TEMP
If you want to upgrade the monitor, please contact GE
ST
representative and provide the MAC address to order a license
key. NeoResp
NOTE: After setting the monitor’s configuration via license key, SpO2 GE
monitor will perform a cold start. Network Unity
NOTE: If disable the IBP or TEMP function, the IBP and TEMP Enter key
related settings in each mode will turn OFF, include the following
settings: Previous Menu
- Waveform Fields
- Digit Fields
- Graphical Trends pages
- Snapshot fields
- Record Waveforms
The IBP and TEMP settings for Record Trends will change to Pleth.
2.6 Enter/Exit Demo Mode

The submenu allows you to enter/exit the demo mode.
Under Demo Mode, the monitor displays the main vital signs values and waveforms. No need
accessories, central station or any other peripheral equipment connect to the monitor while in
Demo Mode.
NOTE: After select this menu, the monitor will restart automatically. A “memory error” message
will appear first time, please mannually restart the monitor again.
NOTE: All the values and waveforms the Monitor displays are fictional.
NOTE: The Demo Mode is only designed for the use of training and demo of operation. It is not
intended for clinical use or patient monitoring and diagnosis.
5-5

3 Frame
The Frame menu includes frame-specific service menus.

Frame
----------------------------
Country Settings
----------------------------
Network
Power Supply ----------------------------
Previous Menu ----------------------------
----------------------------
----------------------------
----------------------------
number:-----------------
200
----------------------------
5-6

Frame
3.1 Country Settings

Languages submenu: See following 3.1.1.
Languages Country Settings
National Reqs: Select software features that
include national requirements. Languages
Power Frequency: Set the power frequency (50/60 National Reqs None
Hz). This setting is used to filter out possible power Power Frequency 60Hz
frequency interference from parameter Time Format 24 h
measurements.
Previous Menu
Time Format: Set the time format of the real-time
clock (12 h or 24 h).
Load laguages and change

current language.
3.1.1 Languages
Language
Country Settings
Select a language to be used during monitoring.
NOTE: Service pages will always appear in English despite Languages
of this selection.
Language ENG.LNG
NOTE: For language codes, see the table below.
Delete Language Delete Language ENG.LNG
Delete a language file from the permanent memory of the Previous Menu POR.LNG
monitor. Cancel
Change language translation of

screen texts from currently
available language files.
5-7

Table 4 Language abbreviations in language file names
Abbreviation Language
CHI Chinese
CZE Czech
DAN Danish
ENG English
FRE French
GER German
HUN Hungarian
ITA Italian
NLB Dutch
NOR Norwegian
POL Polish
POR Portuguese
RUS Russian
SPA Spanish
SWE Swedish
TUR Turkish
FIN Finnish
5-8

Frame
3.2 Network
Different network configuration (S/5 or MC) will have different menus.
MC Network Network Status
Unity: Licensed
Network Config S5: Non-Licensed
TCP/I P HL7: Non-Licensed
HL7 Unit Name: X

Bed Name: D0107
Previous Menu
RtClin Marking: 26
NRtClin Marking: 8
NRtNClin Marking: 0
Interfaces:
Ethernet Not Connected
WLAN Not Connected
Current Interface: Eth_B40
Connection: Unity Network
Free message bu ffers

Current: 42 Minimum: 41
S/5
Network Network Status
Unity: Non-Licensed
Dri Config S5: Licensed
Dri Comm HL7: Non-Licensed
TCP/IP Virtual Plug Id:

Previous Menu Transfer Mode: DRI/ETH
DRI Level: 2009
Interfaces:
Ethernet Not Connected
WLAN Not Connected
Current Interface: Eth_B40
Connection:
Protocol stack restarted

Normal: 0 Error: 0
Free message buffers
Current: 256 Minimum: 255
5-9

3.2.1 Network Config (MC)

Unit Name: It is used for setting the unit name in the monitor.
The default unit name is “X”. 7 characters at most.
Bed Name: It is used for setting the bed name in the monitor.
The default bed name is the last five characters of the MAC
address, excluding the colon delimiter characters. 5
characters at most.
RtClin Marking: It is used for tagging the following outgoing
packets with a DSCP marking of 26 (011010): realtime clinical
information (waveforms, parameters, alarms), Realtime
network control information (time)
NRtClin Marking: It is used for tagging the following outgoing
packets with a DSCP marking of 8 (001000): non-realtime
clinical decision support information (Admission, Histories, Full
Disclosure, Printing)
NRtNClinMark: It is used for tagging the following outgoing
packets with a DSCP marking of 0 (000000): non-realtime,
non-clinical decision support information (Service, InSite)
MCS IP Address: It is used for setting the MCS’s IP address, It’s
grey when network is HL7.
Save Changes: It is gray if the changes have not been done to
the menu information.
NOTE: When save changes the monitor will require a restart
except MCS IP address changed.
3.2.2 TCP/IP
TCP/IP Status
The TCP/IP Status view shows the general status of the TCP/IP set up.
Data link: “NIC” for ehternet,
TCP/IP TCP/IP Status (Ethernet)
DHCP Status: “Disabled“ or “Enabled“ depending
on the DHCP status. Data Link: NIC
TCP/IP Confing
IP Address 172.16.1.54
The DHCP status related information displayed Ping Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0
below. Gateway IP 172.16.254.254
Previous Menu DNS Server Not available
DHCP Server Not available
SLP Not available
DHCP Status: Disabled
Current State INIT REBOOT
Execution State INIT REBOOT
Lease Time 0:00:00
Time Left 0.00.00
Logins 0
5-10

Frame
TCP/IP config
IP address: For setting the static IP address of monitor.
Subnet Mask: For setting the static subnet mask of
monitor.
Default Gateway: For setting the static default gateway
of monitor.
Speed and Duplex: For setting speed and dupliex of
monitor.
Save Changes: Close menu and save the current menu
information to permanent memory.
Cancel Changes: Close menu without saving changes
Ping
IP Address: For configuring the destination IP address for the ping command.
Ping: Enable the ping command by sending Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo
request packets to the target host and wait for an ICMP response. The response should be
show in the Ping Status view.
3.2.3 HL7
The HL7 setup information is on HL7 Status view.
5-11

HL7 config
HL7 Receiver Ip: For setting HL7 receiver IP address.

HL7
HL7 Receiver Port: For setting HL7 receiver port.
HL7 Interval For setting HL7 interval value. HL7 Config
HL7 Patient Class: For setting HL7 patient class.
E : Emergency HL7 Receiver Ip
I : Inpatient HL7 Receiver Port 6000
O : Outpatient HL7 Interval 1 min

P : Preadmit HL7 Patient Class E
R : Reocurring Patient Acknowledgment Enable
B : Obstetrics Save Changes
U : Unknown Previous Menu
Acknowledgment: Enable/Disable acknowledgment
check to HL7 server.
Save Changes: Close menu and save the current menu
information to permanent memory. Set HL7 Receiver Ip
5-12

Frame
3.2.4 Dri Config (S/5)

The DRI Level: For setting the monitor's network
communication. The network communication needs Network
match to the iCentral’s configuration. It should be selected
to 2009. Dri Config
Virtual Plug ID: For setting the same plug ID as in
iCentral’s. Dri Level 2009
Transfer Mode: For choosing the transfer mode: DRI/ETH Virtual Plug ID 7978
or DRI/UDP
Care Area: For setting the care area “OR” or “Non OR” for Transfer Mode DRI/ETH
monitor. Care Area Non OR
Debug server IP: For R&D purpose only.
Debug Server IP
Save Changes: Select "Save Changes" to take in use
changes made in this page. Save Changes
Previous Menu
Push to select DRI Level.
3.2.5 Dri Comm (in S/5)

Session layer
Select Socket 1, 2, 3, 4 to view the status accordingly.
Dest. name shows the name of the Central
the monitor is connected to. Session layer Session Socket 1 Status
Dest. id shows the Central Subnet. Dest. name CENTRALMSF
Socket 1
Dest. address shows the MAC address of Dest. id Central Subnet 1
the monitor network NIC in Central. Socket 2 Dest. address 0a:1a:00:00:03:bb
Socket 3 Protocol special situations:
Protocol specific situations: Socket 4 Tx resent critical 0
For R&D purpose only. Rx non-critical duplicate 0
Previous Menu Rx critical duplicate 0
Rx non-critical with wrong msg num 1
Watchdog traffic disconnect 0
Missing ack disconnect 0
Protocol errors 1
5-13

Ethernet
The Ethernet Status view shows the general status of the ethernet network communication.
Driver: Ethernet chip name.

Cable: Indicates if the ethernet cable is Ethernet Ethernet Status
connected.
Previous Menu Driver DP83907
EthernetAddr: Monitor’s ethernet address. Cable Connected
Speed: Indicates the current ethernet Ethernet Addt 00:40:97:0b:01:fb
communication speed. Speed (bits/s) 0
Statistics In/Packets: Total number of Statistics In Out

received packets since last cold start. Packets 2527 11327
Statistics Out/Packets: Total number of Bytes 297776 9837268
transmitted packets since last cold start.
Data errors
Statistics In/Bytes: Total number of CRC Frame Transm. BER
received bytes since last cold start. 0 0 0 0
Statistics Out/Bytes: Total number of Hardware errors
transmitted bytes since last cold start. Intern. Missed FIFO Overrun
0 0 0 0
The errors in Status view see following
table.
Table 1 Ethernet errors
Value Usage Notes

CRC errors (CRC) Number of received packets with
incorrect checksum.
Frame errors (Frame) Number of received packets with Refers to physical layer
incorrect frame structure. problems. An erroneous packet
has often both frame and CRC
errors.
Transmission errors (Transm.) Number or errors in packet
Transmission.
BER errors (BER)
Internal errors (Intern.) Internal error of the network board. Must always be 0.
Missed packets (Missed) Number of received packets lost due to Must always be 0.
overload.
FIFO errors (FIFO) Internal error of the network board. Must always be 0.
Overrun errors (Overrun) Practically the same as above. Must always be 0.
5-14

Frame
3.3 Power supply

3.3.1 Power page
The menu shows the voltages and temperature measured by the power board and CPU board.
The values in the column under Mean are the mean values of last one second, the Min column
shows the minimum mean value, and the Max column the maximum mean value of the
voltages and temperature measured during the current power ON.
The voltages and currents are measured by the power Board, except the four lowest under
heading CPU Board A/D, which are measured by the CPU Board. +5V and +3.3V values come
thus both from the power Board and CPU Board. System power and Module power are
calculated by the power Board.
Voltages
ACDC AC/DC converter’s output voltage, used as
monitor input voltage when the mains cord is
Power Supply Voltages Min Mean Max
ACDC 14.90 14.90 14.90
connected. Range when present: 15.25…16.55V Power page EXTDC 0.00 0.00 0.00
(Note: this includes the measurement inaccuracy). Bat1 12.00 12.00 12.08
WPM Battery Bat2 12.24 12.24 12.24
EXTDC Not used.
VSvs 14.92 14.92 14.92
Bat1 Battery A voltage measured at power Board. Previous Menu
0.00
VBoost 0.00 0.00
Range 9…12.6V for Li-ION battery VMod 14.98 14.98 14.98
Bat2 Battery B voltage measured at power 1/0 Mod 0.00 0.00 0.00
Board. Range 9…12.6V for Li-ION battery +5V 5.04 5.04 5.04
+3.3V 3.35 3.36 3.37
VSys System voltage at power board. This is the Currents
monitor input voltage measured at the power Mod Current 0.31 0.33 0.39
board after input voltage selection. Range Sys Current 0.87 1.23 1.34
9…16.5V. Bat Current 0.00 0.00 0.00
Powers
VBoost Not used. System Power 12.58 13.87 13.38
VMod Supply voltage for modules. VBOOST is fed Module Power 4.35 4.40 4.84
through a circuit breaker to VMOD. Range Temp C
Power 38.77 38.77 38.77
13.8…16V. Therm Not CHG 0.00 0.00 0.00
I/O Mod Not used. Dummy CHG 0.00 0.00 0.00
CPU Board A/D
+5V At power board. Range 4.8...5.3V.
CPU temp ( C ) 0.00 0.00 0.00
+3.3V At power board. Range 3.15…3.45V. VSvs Out V 0.00 0.00 0.00
Currents +3.3V 0.00 0.00 0.00
Mod Current Current from module bus voltage +5V 0.00 0.00 0.00
VMOD. Depends on the module configuration.
Sys Current Current from system voltage VSYS. Depends on the system configuration and battery charging.
Bat current Current from or to the battery selected (discharge or charge). Measured at power Board. Depends on
the system configuration and battery charging.
Powers
System Power Power from VSYS, calculated by power Board software. System power = VSYS * SYS Current
Module Power Power from VMOD, calculated by power Board software. Module power = VMOD * Mod Current
Temp
Power1, Power2 Power supply unit temperature, measured at power Board.
Therm Not CHG Not used.
Dummy CHG Not used.
CPU Board A/D
CPU Temp Not used.
VSYS_OUT Not used.
+3.3VMeasured at CPU Board. Range 3.15…3.45V.
+5V Measured at CPU Board. Range 4.75…5.25V.
5-15

3.3.2 WPM Battery

Batts
This page contains information related to the batteries and power supplies. The power supply
part is practically the same as in Power Page. Battery information includes also data measured
by the smart batteries themselves and transmitted to the power Board via SMBus.
SMBus is System Management Bus, a two-wire interface closely resembling IIC. SMBus is used
for battery communication.
Batts information section of the page has two columns: Batt1 for battery A data and Batt2 for
battery B data.
NOTE: Text ‘SMBus’ above Current (SMBus mA) line shows which battery is connected to the
SMBus.
5-16

Frame
Battery information Batts Information Batt1 Batt2

WPM Battery Dev . Chem. LION LION
Dev. Chem. Device chemistry. B40i Full Cap. (mAh) 0 3345
monitor supports only Batts Rem.Cap. (mAh) 0 3345
Rel .St. of CHG (%) 0 100
Li-ION batteries. Smart Batt1 SMBUS
Crrent (SMBUS mA) 0 0
Full Cap.(mAh) Full charge capacity of Smart Batt2 Voltage (V) 11. 61 11. 69
the battery; capacity Clear Temp Maxs
Voltage (SMBUS mV) 0 12128
ICHG Low
of the battery when it Batt Temp ( C )
Previous Menu 0. 00 31. 90
is fully charged. Max Batt Temp (PMC) 32. 60 32. 20
Max Batt Temp (SMBUS) 0. 00 32. 00
Rem. Cap. (mAh) Remaining battery
Temps ( C ) Min Mean Max
capacity. Power 45. 11 45. 90 45. 90
CPU 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
Rel. St. of CHG (%) Relative state of Voltages (V)
charge of the battery. ACDC 15. 00 15. 00 15. 00
Expressed as a ExtDC 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
VSys 15. 00 15. 00 15. 08
percentage of Rem. Boost 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
Cap. (mAh) / Full VMod 14. 53 14. 59 14. 69
I/O-VMod 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
Cap.(mAh). Currents (A)
Batt 0. 00 0. 00 0. 00
Current (SMBus mA) Battery current Module 0. 30 0. 32 0. 32
(discharge or charge) Sys 1. 65 1. 16 1. 16
measured by the Powers (W)
Sys 12. 38 13. 52 13. 52
battery, transmitted Module 4. 68 4. 79 4. 84
via SMBus to power
Board.
Voltage (V) Battery voltage measured at the power Board
Voltage (SMBus mV) Battery voltage measured by the battery.
ICHG Charging power level for charger hardware, this bit can have values high or
low. High is the normal setting, low is used when the power Board software
determines to limit the total power consumption of the monitor by limiting the
charging power (i.e. due to high temperature).
Batt Temp (°C) Battery temperature. This is real time data for the battery connected to
SMBus.
Max Batt Temp (PMC) This is subject to change.
Max Batt Temp (SMBUS)Maximum battery SMBus temperature from entering the service pages. Max
values are updated in real time for the battery connected to the SMBus.
Other measurements See explanation in the previous power pages.
5-17

Smart Batt1
Battx information from SMBus (this information Batt1 information from SMBus
is received from the battery via SMBus) WPM Battery Temperature 30.75 C
Temperature: Battery temperature Batts Voltage 11903 mV
Current 0 mA
Voltage: Battery voltage Smart Batt1 Avg. Current 0 mA
Rel. State of Charge 97 %
Current: Battery current (discharge or charge) Smart Batt2
Abs. State of Charge 72 %
Clear Temp Maxs Remaining Capacity 2532 mAh
Avg. Current: Rolling average of the battery Full Charge Capacity 2604 mAh
current Previous Menu Cvcle Count 33
Design Capacity 3520 mAh
Rel. State of Charge: Relative state of charge of Design Voltage 11100 mV
the battery. Expressed as a percentage of Rem.
Manufacture Date(DD:MM:YY) 20/12/24
Cap. (mAh) / Full Cap.(mAh).
Abs. State of Charge: Absolute state of charge. Manufacture Name NPC A07A90
Device Name SM201-6
Expressed as a percentage of Rem. Cap. (mAh)/ Device Chemistry LION
Design Capacity (mAh). Therm. Status from charger
Remaining Capacity: Remaining battery capacity

(mAh).
Full Charge Capacity: Capacity of the battery
when it is fully charged.
Cycle Count: Number of cycles the battery has
experienced. A cycle is an amount of discharge approximately equal to the value of Design Capacity.
The exact value of cycle count threshold is stored in the battery permanent memory.
Design Capacity: Theoretical capacity of a new battery.
Design Voltage: Theoretical value for nominal voltage of a new battery.
Manufacture Date (DD:MM:YY) : The date the battery pack was manufactured.
Manufacturer Name: Acronym of the battery pack manufacturer name.
Device Name: Battery pack model name.
Device Chemistry: Battery chemistry of the cells used.
Therm. Status from charger: Status of the battery thermistor or code resistor read by Smart Battery
Charger IC. The thermistor or code resistor is always connected to the charger whenever the
corresponding battery is connected to the charger and SMBus.
5-18

Frame
Smart Batt2
If Smart Battx is selected for a battery NOT connected to the SMBus, the menu contains the
following:
Battx information from Memory and PMC (This information comes from the power Board
memory or is measured by the power Board. SMBus data in this menu is not real time, because
this battery is not connected to the SMBus).
NOTE: This page may not contain information if SMBus has been connected only to the other
battery. Page can be updated by battery disconnection and reconnection, if desired.
Rel. State Charge: Relative state of charge of the

Batt2 information from Memory and PMC
battery. Expressed as a percentage of Rem. Cap. WPM Battery Rel. State of Charge 0%
(mAh) / Full Cap.(mAh). Batts Remaining Capacity 0 mAh
Remaining Capacity: Remaining battery capacity Full Charge Capacity 0 mAh
Smart Batt1 Design Capacity 0 mAh
(mAh). Design Voltage 0 mV
Smart Batt2
Manufacture Date (DD:MM:YY) 00/00/00
Full Charge Capacity: Capacity of the battery Clear Temp Maxs
when it is fully charged. Manufacturer Name
Previous Menu Device Name
Design Capacity: Theoretical capacity of a new Device Chemistry LION
battery.
DC/DC Board A/D
Design Voltage: Theoretical value for nominal Batt1 Voltage 12.00 V
voltage of a new battery. Batt2 Voltage 12.34 V
Batt Current -0.01 A
Manufacturer Date (DD:MM:YY): The date the Batt Not CHG Temperature 32.24 C
battery pack was manufactured
Manufacturer Name: Acronym of the battery pack
manufacturer name.
Device Name: Battery pack model name.
Device Chemistry: Battery chemistry of the cells
used.
Batt1 Voltage: Battery A voltage measured at the
power Board.
Batt2 Voltage: Battery B voltage measured at the power Board.
Batt Current: Battery current (discharge or charge) for the battery connected to SMBus.
Measured at the power Board.
Batt Not CHG Temperature: This is subject to change.
Clear Temp Maxs

This command is useful only when the WPM Battery Batts view is selected.
The Clear Temp Maxs command clears the maximum values of Batt Temp (SMBus) and Batt
Temp (PMC).
Note: Power temp and CPU temp maxs are not cleared.
5-19

4 Keyboard
The service menu for testing the command board functions.
Red Led is for testing the red alarm light on the

monitor. When the text is highlighted, the red alarm Keyboard Service Data
light can be turned on and off by pressing the Trim Message count 0
Red Led Leds red OFF yellow OFF cyan OFF
Knob.
Yellow Led is for testing the yellow alarm light on the Yellow Led Direct action keys
monitor. When the text is highlighted, the yellow Cyan Led Admit/ Pt. Data SpO2 ECG
Dischar & Trends
alarm light can be turned on and off by pressing the Dummy Press
Trim Knob. Keyboard Log NIBP Invasive Normal
Pressures Screen
Cyan Led is for testing the cyan alarm light on the Previous Menu
Monitor Print/
monitor. When the text is highlighted, the cyan alarm Setup Record
light can be turned on and off by pressing the Trim
Airway Others Silence Alarms
Knob. Gas Alarms Setup
Dummy Press is for testing the Trim Knob. When the
Zero Auto Start Start
text is highlighted, pressing the Trim Knob creates a All On/Off Cancel Stop
sound from the loudspeaker and the corresponding
number on the service data field increases. Control wheel
Press 0
Clokwise 0 Counterclokwise 0
Service Data
Message Count counts the number of messages that are sent out to the main CPU board.
Leds upper and lower indicate the states of the alarm lights on the monitor.
Direct action keys texts are indications to the command board membrane keys. When a key
on the command board is pressed, the corresponding text in the menu changes its color.
Control wheel, Press counts the Trim Knob pressings.
Control wheel, Clockwise and Counter clockwise indicate the Trim Knob turnings.
5-20

Keyboard
4.1 Keyboard Log

All the keyboard presses and the commands given by the Trim Knob are recorded in the
Keyboard Log. The length of the log is 80 events. The log is FIFO type.
Scroll Log: enables to scroll the keyboard log. Keyboard Keyboard Log
Scroll Stat: enables to scroll the keyboard Scroll Log
presses events. Scroll Stat Keyboard : Keyboard Log
2004- Jan- 29 05:40:54
Record Log: to record keyboard log.
Record Log Service Menu : Keyboard
Record Stat: to record keyboard stat. 2004- Jan- 29 05:40:40
Record Stat
Reset Log: to reset the keyboard log. Display : Previous Menu
Reset Log 2004- Jan- 29 05:40:39
Service menu : Display
Previous Menu
2004- Jan- 29 05:40:11
Frame : Previous Menu
2004- Jan- 29 05:40:09
Network : Previous Menu
2004- Jan- 29 05:40:05
Network Config : Previous Menu
2004- Jan- 29 05:40:00
TCP/IP : Previous Menu
2004- Jan- 29 05:39:57
TCP/IP Config : Previous Menu
2004- Jan- 29 05:39:40
5-21

5 Parameters
NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data fields are only for reference in this section.
5-22

Parameters
5.1 Gas Unit

5.1.1 General
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at power off. The
values may also be reset when a module is attached to the monitor frame and be set to 32769
or continuous counting may be started when the module is removed from the monitor frame.
The nonzero values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per
second) or value 32769 indicates either a serial communication failure or a module not in
place. Also failures in other modules may cause these numbers to rise or be set to 32769.
Module configuration shows which measurement

options are available, i.e. are detected by the module. General Service Data
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how Previous Menu Module configuration
MiniC CO2 O2 N20 AA id p&v GasExch
many times the module has not responded to the 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
monitor's inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates
how many times communication from the module to 0 = not available
monitor has broken down. 1 = available
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates

how many communication errors the module has
detected.
Timeouts -12867
Bad checksums 0
Bad c-s by moc 0
5-23

5.1.2 Gases
Noise Meas activates the noise measurement.

Gases Serivce Data
Sample gain adj adjusts the sampling pump gain, i.e. OFF
for adjusting the sample flow Noise Meas % noise-% mv Gain
measurement. O2 --- --- --- ---
Sample gain adj CO2 0.00 300.0 2826 1.010
Pump ctrl A manual control for the sampling Pump ctrl
N20 --- --- --- ---
pump. AA1 A
Zero valve ctrl AA2 --- --- B ---
Zero valve ctrl A manual control for the zero valve. ID --- C ---
ID unrel. --- D ---
Previous Menu
MAC E ---
Sample Flow 148.7 Zero 0.0ml/min
Gain 1.000
Ambient 1013 Amb- Work 49.6mbar
OFF Fall time CO2 --- 02 ---ms
CO2-02 Delay 0ms
Pump ON 0.97% 1881mV

Lamp ON 56.23% 75mA
Fan ON
Zero Valve MEAS Occl Valve MEAS
Temp TPX 45.6 CPU 0.0 OM 0.0
Time after power on 54min
Service Data
O2, CO2, N2O, AA % shows real-time concentrations.
noise-% is standard deviation of concentration.
O2, CO2, N2O, AA channels A-E mV: signal is scaled to mV.
Gain User gain. It is scaled as (User gain)/(Factory gain).
ID Identified agent.
ID unrel. The shown value tells how unreliable the identification is. With pure agent the value is normally
<50.
MAC MAC value
Sample Flow calculated from differential pressure and adjusted by the module. Zero value as measured
during initialization when the pump is off. Gain: sample flow measurement can be calibrated
by adjusting the gain.
Ambient Ambient pressure is measured every 30 min.
Amb-Work Ambient pressure - sampling system internal pressure.
Fall time CO2 and O2 in ms. For N2O and AA same as CO2.
CO2-O2 Delay In ms. No delay between CO2, N2O, and agents.
Pump Can be toggled ON/OFF. PWM output 0-100% is shown. Pump voltage is also shown.
Lamp The state, PWM control, and current of the lamp are shown.
Fan The state of the fan is shown.
Zero and Occl Valve Can be toggled between measurement state (MEAS) and zeroing/occlusion states
(ZERO/OCCL).
Temp Temperatures measured by the module from TPX, CPU, and OM.
Time after power on In minutes after power on.
5-24

Parameters
5.2 ECG Module

Power Freq is used to changing the power frequency for ECG module, it can display in Service
Data’s view. To press this menu, change 50 Hz to 60 Hz, or 60 Hz to 50 Hz.
Service Data
Power Freq shows the mains frequency selected: 50

Hz / 60 Hz ECG Module Serivce Data
Cable type shows the leadwire set connected: 3 lead / Power Freq 50 Hz Quick Zero 0
ECG Setup Cable type 5 lead Artifact 0
5 lead Electrode RA LA LL V1 RL
Power Freq
Quick Zero shows 1 when the ECG signal is beyond ON ON ON OFF ON
Previous Menu V2 V3 V4 V5 V6
scale, and therefore, is quickly returned to the optimal 0FF OFF OFF ON OFF
range with fast signal processing methods.
Pacer vount 0 R count 4625
Artifact shows 1 when artifacts are detected.
Electrode shows ON when each of these electrodes is Resp: Avail 1 Value 20
Zeroing 0 MeasOff 0
connected.
Pacer count is a running number of detected Arrhythmia 0 On/ Off 1
HR 80 HR25 80 HR75 80
pacemaker spikes. QRS count 4607 PVC 0
R count is a running number of detected R waves. Det leads1 6 nroleads 2
Data -73 -12 Noise M/A 0
Resp: Avail shows if a module with impedance
measurement is plugged (1) or not plugged (0) into the Timeouts 6 RAM OK
Bad Checksum 0 ROM OK
monitor.
Bad cs-by mo 0 EEPROM OK
Value shows the measured respiration rate value for Leads Off 0 MissedPkgs 4
impedance respiration.
Zeroing indicates the zeroing status of the respiration measurement: 1 = zeroing, 0 = not zeroing.
MeasOff shows 1 if the respiration measurement is set to OFF, and 0 if the the respiration
measurement is set to ON.
Arrhythmia shows an active arrhythmia alarm (VFIB, VTAC, ASY).
On/Off shows 1 if arrhythmia analysis is active and 0 if it is not active.
HR, HR25 and HR75 for R&D purpose only
QRS count shows the running number of detected QRS complexes.
PVC shows the PVCs detected per minute
Det leads shows the leads that are being used for detecting beats and ventricular fibrillation. The
selection of user leads (ECG1, ECG2, ECG3) on the monitor affects the leads used for detection. The first
lead used for detection is lead either I or II. The algorithm uses the lead appearing first in user leads. The
second lead used for detection is one of the precordial leads (V1 - V6): -1 = invalid (not used), 0 = lead I,
1 = II or III; 2 = V1, 3 = V2, 4 = V3, 5 = V4, 6 =V5, 7 = V6
nroleads shows the number of leads that are beign used for detecting beats and ventricular fibrillation.
Possible values include: 0 , 1 and 2 (ref. Det leads) analysis.
Data for R&D purpose only
Noise M/A for R&D purpose only
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many times the module has not responded to the
monitor’s inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how many times communication from the
module to the monitor has broken down.
5-25

Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how many communication errors the
module has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at power off. The values
may also be reset when a module is attached to the monitor frame and be set to 32769 or
continuous counting may be started when the module is removed from the monitor frame.
The nonzero values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per
second) or value 32769 indicates either a serial communication failure or a module not in place.
Also failures in other modules may cause these numbers to rise or be set to 32769.
RAM indicates the state of the RAM memory.
ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in accordance with the one the software
has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a communication error).
LeadsOff indicates whether the monitor can measure ECG even if one or more leadwires are off:
1 = measurement is not possible, 0 = measurement can be done.
MissedPkgs indicates the number of packages missed.
5.2.1 ECG Setup

Filter filters the ECG signal high frequency noise and
slow respiratory artifacts: ECG Module Service Data
- Monit (monitor) filter is used in routine monitoring. Quick Zero 0
ECG Setup Artifact 0
It effectively filters the artifacts caused by the LL V RL
Filter STfilt
electrosurgery unit and respiration. ON OFF ON
Monit V4 V5 V6
! Pacemaker Hide
- Diagn (diagnostic) filter is used if more accurate OFF OFF OFF
information of the waveform is needed (e.g. of STfilt
Rcount 0
P-wave or AV block). The diagnostic filter is more Previous Menu Diagn
susceptible both to high frequencies and baseline Value ---
MeasOff 1
wander than the monitor filter.
On/Off 0
- STfilt (ST filter) permits more accurate information HR75 ---
of ST segment. It filters the high frequency artifacts PVC 0
caused by the electrosurgery unit, but catches the nroleads 0
slow changes in ST segment. The ST filter is more Noise M/A 0 0
susceptible to baseline wander than the monitor RAM OK
filter. Use ST filter for optimal ROM OK
ST analysis. EEPROM OK
Pacemaker selects how to display the pacing pulse of
MissedPkgs 0
cardiac pacemaker. The selections are Show, Hide
and Sensit:
- Hide: the pacing pulse is filtered away from ECG
data.
- Show: the pacer pulse is filtered away from ECG
data but the pulse is displayed as a constant
height marker.
- Sensit: uses a more sensitive pacemaker
detection. Pacemaker spike is displayed on ECG.
5-26

Parameters
5.3 STP Module (for GE SpO2)

Record Data prints out the shown service data and board information (id, serial number and
sw id) onto the recorder.
Temp Test activates the automatic temperature test for the temperature channels T1 and T2.
The result from the test is shown in the service data field.
NOTE: The Temp Test needs to be selected twice before the test starts.
Service Data field

STP Module Serivce Data
Gain is a coefficient to compensate gain error. Usually P1 P2 T1 T2
the values for P1 and P2 are between 17000 and 25000 Calibrations Gain 11161 11163 -7562 -7569
Zero -10295 -10295 9674 9695
and for T1 and T2 between 13000 and 14300. Record Data
Cable ON ON ON ON
Zero indicates the offset compensation value of each Temp test Probe ON ON ON ON
Value 76./4 /.94 3/.09 3/.09
parameter in the A/D converter. Typically the values for Previous Menu
Buttons OFF OFF
P1 and P2 are within ±1000 and for T1 and T2 between
SpO2 --- Ired Int. 71
-150 and +300. Calibrate if zero and/or gain value is Modpr --- Red Int. 70
outside the ranges. Hr --- DC gain 5
Cable ON IDC 14115
Cable shows ON when a corresponding cable is Probe ON RDC 11193
connected to the front panel OK AC gain 0
Pre gain 0
Probe shows ON when a corresponding probe is Temp error OFF OFF
connected to the cable. Temp test OFF
Value shows the measured numeric values Protect key ON
Protect mode ON
simultaneously. Pressure values are real time values and Configuration STP
shown in mmHg. Temperature values are shown in
Timeouts 2 RAM OK
degrees Celsius. Bad checksums 0 ROM OK
Bad c-s by mode 0 EEPROM OK
SpO2 shows the measured beat-to-beat SpO2 value.
Modpr is a modulation % that indicates the AC/DC ratio in the measured signal.
Hr is a pulse rate calculated from every beat.
Cable and Probe can be either OFF or ON, and these indicate the state PROBE OFF.
Under them there is a message field for SpO2. It can be OK, PULSE SEARCH, CBL OFF, PROBE OFF, NO
PULSE, ARTEFACT, POOR SIGNAL, or CHECK PROBE.
Balance between leds is adjusted by changing the intensity of red/infrared. Intensity of infrared (Ired
Int.) is in the range of 40 to 255 and red intensity (Red Int.) is in the range of 40 to 255.
DC gain shows the gain of DC signal adjusted by the module.
IDC is the value of infrared signal.
RDC is the dc value of red signal.
AC gain is the gain of infrared and red ac signals. AC gain values can be 1 or 0. Value 1 means high ac
gain and 0 means low gain.
Pre gain is a preamplifier gain for infrared and red signals. Pre gain values can be 1 or 0. Value 1 means
normal operation. Value 0 means that signal levels are very low and extra gain is taken into use.
5-27

Temp error shows the status of the temperature test. No errors found show the
status (OFF) and errors found (ON).
Protect key and Protect mode show normally ON but can be turned to OFF for
the temperature calibration in Calibration Menu.
Configuration shows the chosen module configuration: T, P, TP, ST, or STP.
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many times the module
has not responded to the monitor’s inquiry. Bad checksums is a cumulative
number that indicates how many times communication from the module to the
monitor has broken down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how many
communication errors the module has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at
power off. The nonzero values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous
counting (more than 5 per second) indicates either a serial communication
failure, or a module not in place. Also other modules can cause communication
errors that cause these numbers rise.
ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in accordance with the
one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a communication error).
5-28

Parameters
5.3.1 Calibrations
Protection: Protection for the configuration and

STP Module Service Data
temperature calibrations can be set ON and OFF.
T1 T2
Calibrate T1 / Calibrate T2: The functions are for Calibrations 5185 15196
calibrating the temperature channels T1 and T2. 34 33
Protection ON ON ON
Calibrate P1/ Calibrate P2: The functions are for Calibrate T1 ON ON
calibrating the invasive blood pressure channels : 6./ 4 3/ .05
Calibrate T2
P1 and P2. OFF
Calibrate P1 int. 220
Calibrate P2 int. 220
ain 110
Previous Menu 2047
2047
OFFin 0
gain 1
OFF OFF
Calibrate transducer with

manometer. push Comwheel to 2 RAM OK
start zeroing. 0 ROM OK
0 EEPROM OK
How to calibrate T1/ T2

The calibrations are possible only when the protection is set OFF. The temperature calibration
requires accurate test plugs of value 25 °C and 45 °C.
1. Select Calibrate T1/Calibrate T2
2. Insert the test plug 25 °C into the T1/T2 connector
3. Press the Trim Knob
4. Insert the test plug 45 °C into the T1/T2 connector
5. Press the Trim Knob
How to calibrate P1/ P2

NOTE: Before starting the pressure calibration, disconnect all patient cables and discharge the
patient.
The calibrations require a pressure transducer (with appropriate cable) and a pressure
manometer.
1. Connect the pressure transducer with the pressure manometer to the P1/P2 connector.
Select Calibrate P1/Calibrate P2. Leave the transducer to room air pressure.
2. Press the Trim Knob to start zeroing.
3. Supply a pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the transducer. The recommended
pressure is 200 mmHg.
4. Set the pressure on the display to match the pressure reading on the manometer and
press the Trim Knob.
5-29

5.4 NIBP Module

Service Data
Pressure shows the measured pressure multiplied
by 10. This value is automatically zero-drift
NIBP Module Service Data
compensated. B1 B2
Pressure 000000 000000
Zero shows the difference between the zeroing Calibrations
Zero -00010 000000
value in the permanent memory (stored when the Safety Valve
St1 0000 AD0 -17
module is calibrated) and the current automatic
Pnematics St2 0000 AD1 6
zero-drift compensation multiplied by 10. The value St3 0400 AD2 -1
can change between +20 and -20 mmHg. If the zero Previous Menu St4 0000 AD3 1502
drift exceeds ± 10 mmHg, the module should be AD4 2
ON AD5 -1644
recalibrated. OFF AD6 5
AD0 to AD7 show the values of each eight channels OFF AD7 -1505
of the A/D converter.
ST1: Master status, indicate measurement,
B1 B2
calibration, zeroing whether ongoing Offset 000103 000096
ST2: Button status, Not used yet. Gain 000041 000041
ST3: Hardware status, indicate the power supply

status, ADC error status. Timeouts 2 RAM OK
ST4: Measurement result status, indicate whether Bad checksums 0 ROM OK
Bad c-s by mod 0 EEPROM OK
measurement is ready, whether cuff ID is updated
Offset show the offset values for B1 and B2 ( pressure sensor calibration factors).
Gain show the gain values for B1 and B2 ( pressure sensor calibration factors).
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many times the module has not responded to
the monitor’s inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how many times communication from the
module to the monitor has broken down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how many communication errors the module
has detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at power off. The nonzero
values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per second) indicates
either a serial communication failure, or a module not in place. Also other modules can cause
communication errors that cause these numbers rise.
ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in accordance with the one the software has
calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent memory are valid. The state is either OK,
Fail or ? (module not in place or a communication error).
5-30

Parameters
5.4.1 NIBP Calibration
Active Leak Test: Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe

NIBP Module Service Data
and connect the cuff to the module. Select the active
B1 B2
leak test (ON). The module automatically pumps a Calibration 00 000000
pressure of 280 mmHg into the cuff. Wait for several 10 000000
seconds until the pressure stabilizes. Then check Active Leak Test OFF
AD0 -17
that the pressure reading does not drop more than 6 Calibration Check OFF AD1 6
mmHg per minute. If it does, leaking point(s) should Protection OFF AD2 -1
be detected and fixed. Cancel the test by selecting AD3 1502
Calibrate AD4 2
the Active leak test OFF. Previous Menu AD5 -1643
Calibration Check: After the calibration check is AD6 5
AD7 -1505
selected (ON), the module zeroes the pressure
transducers at the beginning of the calibration
check. Do not pump pressure until the text ‘Zeroed’
appears in the NIBP digit field or the zeroing will fail.
After the zeroing is done, manually pump pressure
into the module and make sure that the same
pressure values are shown both on the display and 2 RAM OK
on the manometer. Pressure of both pressure 0 ROM OK
channels B1 and B2 are shown. The pressure values 0 EEPROM OK
are automatically zero-compensated, so the
readings of B1 and B2 should be the same as the manometer readings.
Protection: Software calibration protection (ON/OFF). Select OFF when calibrating.
How to calibrate
NOTE: Perform NIBP Calibration Check first to evaluate if calibration is needed or not.
NOTE: Both transducers B1 and B2 will be calibrated simultaneously.
NOTE: The module must be in the frame during the whole procedure.
NOTE: Calibration selection is available only when protection is OFF.
1. Change the protection setting from ON to OFF to enable the Calibrate selection - the
color of the Calibrate selection changes from grey to white.
2. Zeroing:
− Disconnect the NIBP hose from the module connector.
− Select Calibrate and push the Trim Knob.
NOTE: Messages ‘Zeroing’ and ‘Zeroed’ is shown in the NIBP message field and next to the
Calibrate selection momentarily. After this, a pressure bar will appear beside the menu.
3. Calibration:
− Connect the NIBP hose to the module connector.
− Connect an external manometer with a pump to both tubes of the hose.
− Pump about 200 mmHg pressure.
− Verify that both pressure values, B1 and B2, shown in the prompt field of the
calibration menu match the manometer reading. If not, adjust the by turning the
Trim KnobTrim Knob.
− Press Trim Knob to complete the calibration.
5-31

NOTE: Messages ‘Calibrating’ and ‘Calibrated’ are shown in the NIBP message field and next to
the Calibrate selection.
NOTE: When calibrating NIBP, always change the displayed pressure value slightly with the
Trim Knob, even in cases where the value would be correct. For example, change the value one
step higher and then back one step lower. The ‘Calibrated’ text should appear in the display.
This ensures that the calibration procedure is correctly registered and stored by the module.
4. Change the Protection setting from OFF to ON to disable Calibrate selection - the color of
the Calibrate selection changes from white to grey.
Protection ON.
5.4.2 NIBP Safety Valve
Start test is for starting and Stop test for stopping the
Safety Valve test. Safety Valve Safety Valve Data
B1 B2
Pressure 000000 000000
Zero 000000 000000
Safety Valve Data: ADULT
Start Test St1 0000 AD0 -16
For information on general items Pressure, Zero, St1 to St2 0000 AD1 6
Previous Menu
St4, AD0 to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see service St3 0400 AD2 -1
St4 0000 AD3 1502
data descriptions in section 4.4 NIBP Module. AD4 2
Max. press and 2 s after stop show the measured AD5 -1643
AD6 4
values at Safety Valve test. AD7 -1505
B1 B2
Max press 0 0
2 s after stop 0 0
Timeouts 2 RAM OK
Bad checksums 0 ROM OK
Bad c-s by mod 0 EEPROM OK
How to do safety valve test

1. Disconnect the pressure manometer from the NIBP cuff connector. Connect the NIBP
hose and cuff to the NIBP cuff connector.
2. Connect a standard adult cuff around some round object, for example a calibration gas
bottle.
3. Perform a NIBP test by pressing NIBP Start/Cancel button (Waiting until the test ended).
4. Select Start Test. Start the adult safety valve test by pressing the Trim Knob. Wait until the
pump stops and the pressure is deflated.
5. Check the pressure values ‘Max press’ for both transducers. All the values should be
within 300 - 330 mmHg.
6. Connect a neonatal hose and cuff around another round object, for example a calibration
gas bottle.
7. Perform a NIBP test by pressing NIBP Start/Cancel button (Waiting until the test ended).
8. Select Start Test. Start the neonatal safety valve test by pressing the Trim Knob. Wait until
the pump stops and the pressure is deflated.
5-32

Parameters
9. Check the pressure values ‘Max press’ for both transducers. All the values should be
within 150 - 165 mmHg.
10. Return to the normal monitoring mode by pressing Normal Screen.
5.4.3 NIBP Pneumatics
Start Pump/Stop Pump: A manual control for the pump.

The selection changes to Stop Pump when the pump turns
Pneumatics Pneumatics Data
B1 B2
on. Pressure 000000 000000
Start Pump
Zero -00010 000000
Open Safe. Valve/Close Safe. Valve: A manual control for
Open Safe. Valve
the Safe valve. The selection changes to Close Safe Valve St1 0000
AD0 -17
Open Defl. Valve AD1 6
when the valve is opened. St2 0000 AD2 -1
Reset Clock St3 0400 AD3 1502
Open Defl. Valve/Close Defl. Valve: A manual control for St4 0000 2
Previous Menu AD4
the deflation valve. The selection changes to Close Defl. AD5 -1643
Valve when the valve is opened. AD6 4
AD7 -1505
Reset Clock: Set up the Interval time 20 mmHg -> 185
mmHg to 0 s Pump Safety Deflate
Valve Valve
OFF CLOSED CLOSED
Pneumatics Data field Interval 20 mmHg -> 185 mmHg 0s
For information on general items Pressure, Zero, St1 to Timeouts 2 RAM OK

Bad checksums 0 ROM OK
St4, AD0 to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see section "NIBP Bad c-s by mod 0 EEPROM OK
Module."
Pump, Safety Valve, and Deflate Valve show their states.
How to check Interval 20 mmHg -> 185 mmHg

Select Start pump at different combinations of the valves open/closed and push the Trim
Knob. The module counts the time it takes for the pressure to go up from 20 mmHg to 185
mmHg and displays it. When all the valves are closed, the pump should be able to pump the
pressure in about 1 to 4 seconds into an adult cuff wrapped around a pipe. The pump does not
stop without selecting Stop Pump by pushing the Trim Knob.
NOTE: To redo the test, must go back to the previous menu.
5-33

5.5 SpO2 (for Masimo/Nellcor SpO2)

SpO2 Data
PR: Measured pulse rate value
SpO2 SpO2 Data
SpO2%: Measured SpO2 value
NoProbe: If there is a probe connected Previous Menu PR -----
PulseSearch: If the pulse search is being SpO2% -----
done.
CheckProbe: If there is check probe error.
QUART Status: Show quart status. NoProbe 1
POX Status: Show POX measurement PulseSearch 0
status. CheckProbe 0
I/O Status: Show IO status.

QUART Status 0000
POX Error: Show POX error status. POX Status 0000
I/O Status 9E08
POX Error 0000
For information on Timeouts etc., see

section "NIBP Module."
Timeouts 2
Return to Bad checksums 0 ROM OK
Previous menu. Bad c-s by mod 0
5.6 Entropy
When the Entropy Service Menu is open, the function of Entropy module keys will be disabled.
Check Sensor: to replace module keys function to check the entropy sensor.
Module: to show the Module status in the right window.
Sensor: to show the Sensor status in the right window.
5-34

Parameters
Module status
Measurement: show messurement status
Last Service: Service log
Entropy, Check sensor: to check the
module keyboard. Press the module keys,
these 2 items will highlight.
Main: If the pulse search is being done.
BSR status: show the status for Burst
supression classification. There are 4
status: Artefact; Supression; Burst; Invalid
(not used)
Artefact: artefect whether detected.
Diathermy: diathermy whether detected.
AD clipped: AD-converted value whether
clipped
Alg.ver.(Mon), Alg.ver.(Mod), Alg.ver.used:
These 3 items show version of entropy
algorithm, B40i always use algorithm from
monitor.
For information on Timeouts etc., see
section "NIBP Module."
Sensor status
Entropy, Check sensor: to check the
module keyboard. Press the module keys,
these 2 items will highlight.
Cable, Sensor: whether detect cable and
sensor.
Sensor S/N, Sensor Lot: show the sensor
information
Lead: whether detected each of 3 points
of sensor.
Imped.: imped. value for each of 3 points
of sensor.
Imp. Meas: whether Imped. measurement
on.
Imp.: whether is ok for Imped
measurement.
5-35

6 Set/Test
The system contains a watchdog circuitry, which needs refreshment at every 10 seconds. If the
refreshment did not occur, the watchdog will reset the main CPU.
The purpose of the watchdog is to restart the monitor, if there was a serious malfunction. This
feature is useful in two cases: when the main CPU is not able to control the monitor, or when
the CPU controls the monitor but detects a serious malfunction. Watchdog tests check proper
functionality of the watchdog in various conditions.
Watchdog test ensures directly that the watchdog

functions properly. Choosing this test prevents the
watchdog from refreshing and shows running Set / Test
seconds with an accuracy of 0.1 seconds. ----------------------------
The test should have the following result when the Watchdog
watchdog is working properly: The monitor will ----------------------------
WD by Over load
restart after 10 seconds from the start of the test. In
Factory Reset ----------------------------
malfunction: ‘>20 s’ is displayed. In this case, the
fault is in the watchdog. Previous Menu
----------------------------
WD by Overload test ensures the functionality of a
feature, where the software controls the monitor, ----------------------------
but detects an overload situation in the main CPU. ----------------------------
The test should have the following result when the
----------------------------
feature is working properly: The monitor will restart
2, 2004-03-15
after 10 seconds from the start of the test. number:-----------------
Factory Reset restores the factory default settings
and clears the data memories. Factory reset should ----------------------------
be run if the monitor software is replaced or if the
Timekeeper battery is replaced.
5-36

Service Log
7 Service Log
Error, event and alarm data is stored in the Service Log.
The service log contains information about the occurred monitor errors, events and alarms
since the last factory reset or service log reset.
Error Log is for selecting the error history view onto
the right side of the menu. Error Log shows also Service Log Error History
some monitoring events like warm and cold starts.
Error Log
Alarm Log is for selecting the alarm history view onto Last errors:
Alarm Log
the right side of the menu.
Scroll Log 2010-Nov-27 13:50:08
Scroll Log is for scrolling the error/alarm information UMBC handler: LOG Msg<Umbc reset> at
on the right side of the menu. Record Log UmbcChannel. cpp(189)
Record Log is for recording the service log Reset Log

information onto the recorder. Previous Menu
Reset Log is for clearing up the content of the
selected service log. This function should be run after
a performed maintenance.
5-37

5-38

6 Field replaceable
unit
Spare part
1 Spare part
The following B40i parts will be available as field replaceable spare parts.
1.1 Front cover
6-1

1.2 Back cover unit
6-2

Spare part
1.3 Frame
1.4 Extension rack
6-3

1.5 Hemo box
1.6 FRU parts list
Item Description Order Code

2 FRU B40V2 Tian Ma LED Backlight Display Module 2061869-008
3 FRU B40V2 Tian Ma LED Backlight Display Convert 2061869-009
4 FRU B40B20 ethenet board 2053489-004
6 FRU B40B20 user Interface board 2053489-006
7 FRU B40B20 Speaker 2053489-007
8 FRU B40 Frame cables and mechenical parts 2053489-008
71 FRU B40V2 Power Board 2061869-004
11 FRU B40B20 battery board 2053489-011
12 FRU B40B20 AC/DC unit 2053489-012
13 FRU B40B20 AC inlet 2053489-013
15 FRU B40V2 Handle 2061869-013
79 FRU B40i Keyboard/Membrane * 2061869-040
21 FRU B40B20 Trim Knob 2053489-021
69 FRU B40V2 Front Cover without Keypad * 2061869-002
24 FRU B40B20 Module interface board 2053489-024
43 FRU B40B20 Hemo Nellcor 2053489-043
44 FRU B40B20 Hemo Masimo 2053489-044
45 FRU B40B20 Hemo with GE STP (SpO2, Temp, IBP) 2053489-045
6-4

Spare part

46 FRU B40B20 Hemo with GE SpO2 (SpO2) 2053489-046
47 FRU B40B20DASH2500 PRINTER 2023852-008
48 FRU B40B20 Recorder connect board 2053489-048
49 FRU B40B20 RAC flex cable 2053489-049
70 FRU B40V2 Rack Cover 2061869-003
51 FRU B40B20 Adapter 2053489-051
53 FRU B40 ALARM LIGHT 2053489-053
54 FRU B40V2 Battery Cover 2061869-014
64 FRU B40B20B30 BATTERY 2044978-004
* NOTE: 2061869-040 FRU B40i keyboard/Membrane includes multi-languages labels. When service people replace front
cover, please order both 2061869-002 and 2061869-040.
1.7 Other parts

- CABLE RS232 0.76 M 2025963-001
NOTE: Please buy this part locally. MPN: CS2N9MF-2.5
- FRU B40V2 Software Recovery CD VSP-B 1.01 2061869-007
- FRU B40V2 Software Recovery CD VSP-B 1.05 2061869-030
6-5

2 Disassembly
WARNING A short circuit may cause internal damage. Do not touch any exposed
wiring or conductive surface inside, this may cause an electric shock.
CAUTION Perform leakage current measurement whenever service or repair has been
done in the monitor.
Field repair of the patient monitor is limited to replacing Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). See “1.
Spare part” for a detailed list of available FRUs. Attempting a field repair on a printed circuit
board or a factory sealed component or assembly could jeopardize the safe and effective
operation of the monitor.
NOTE: Only a qualified service technician should perform field replacement procedures.
NOTE: Perform the checkout procedure described in chapter 3 “4. Maintenance and checkout”
after you have disassembled and reassembled the module.
2.1 ESD precautions

Refer to 1.2.4. ESD precautionary procedures in Chapter 1.
2.2 Reassembly precautions

GE recommends using the new fasteners (screws, washers, etc.) provided in the FRU kits rather
than re-using the old fasteners. Some fasteners are not intended to be re-used more than
three times. Use only new screws attaching into aluminium. Take advantage of existing thread
pattern cut by turning the screw counterclockwise until it drops into the existing thread
pattern.
• When reassembling the monitor, comply with the given torque [x Nm] for the screws.
Note the positions of any wires, cables or connectors. Mark them if necessary to ensure
that they are re-assembled correctly.
• Save and set aside all hardware for reassembly.
2.3 Required tools

• Insulated screwdrivers; PH2, PO1, PH1, Hex 5.5 (recommend the length > 65 mm)
• Insulated Flat blade screwdriver 3 mm
• Antistatic wristband
2.4 Before disassembly

NOTE: Wear a grounded, antistatic wristband when handling PC boards. Electrostatic
discharge may damage components on the board.
− Turn the monitor off from the On/Off button.
− Disconnect the monitor power cord first from the wall outlet and then from the monitor.
− Remove the battery.
− Disconnect all external cables connected to the monitor.
− Detach the E module from the frame.
6-6

Disassembly
− Detach the monitor from the mount if installed.
2.5 To separate the frame

To separate the extension rack,
hemo module and multi I/O from
the frame
1. Remove the 2 screws from the bottom of the frame
NOTE: When place the monitor face down, be careful of the
screen and the Trim Knob.
2. Remove the screw beside the monitor.

NOTE: When assembly the extension rack, please install this
screw first before 2 screw in the bottom
3. From the back side of the monitor, pull the extension rack
out of frame, grasp it firmly.
6-7

4. Open the battery’s cover, use a screwdriver to release the

latch by pivoting the screwdriver away from the monitor.
NOTE: Using the 3 mm Flat blade screwdriver into the small
hole inside, pull the latch to the screen side.
5. Using the screwdriver to pry the module from the monitor at
the same time.
6. Pull the hemo module out of the monitor.
7. Use the screwdriver to prize, pulling out the multi I/O at the
same time.
6-8

Disassembly
2.6 To disassemble the frame

- Remove the 2 screws from the back side of the frame, open
the cover.
To open the back cover of the

frame
- Remove the 4 screws from top of the frame
- Remove other 3 screws from the frame
- Lift the back cover up
To change the handle After opening the back cover
- Remove 2 screws for the handle.
6-9

To remove the front cover

- Remove 4 screws by the side of the frame
- Disconnect the alarm light cable

- Disconnect the connection cable
- Open and remove the front cover from the frame
To remove the alarm light board After opening the front cover
- Remove 2 screws, the alarm light board is on the top of the

front cover.
To remove the user interface board After opening the front cover
6-10

Disassembly
- Remove 2 screws, the user interface board is on the bottom

of the front cover
- Disconnect the Trim Knob cable
- Disconnect the keyboard/membrane switch cable
To separate the display

- Remove 4 screws from beside the display
- Disconnect the display inverter cable and remove the screw.
- Disconnect the display cable on the bottom side of the

screen
- Remove the display
NOTE: When reassemble the display, be careful that no dirt or

finger prints are left.
To remove the loudspeaker unit After removing the display
- Disconnect the cable from CPU board

- Remove 2 screws for the loudspeaker
To remove the ACDC unit
6-11

- Remove screw
- Disconnect the cable to power board.
- Disconnect the cable to ethenet board
- Slightly lift the front of the ACDC unit, push the whole ACDC
unit to top direction.
- Lift the unit up

- Disconnect the cable to power board
- Disconnect all the rest cables from the CPU board

- Separate the whole unit from the frame
To remove the ethenet board

- Remove 3 screws for ethenet board
- Lift up the ethenet board from the frame
To remove the CPU board
6-12

Disassembly
- Remove 4 screws for the CPU Board
NOTE: Replace the CPU battery every 5 years.
- Carefully disconnect the CPU board from the power board,

and remove it out.
To remove the power board and

battery board
- Remove the rest 7 screws off
- Carefully disconnect the CPU board from the power board,
and remove it out first
- Remove the battery board out of the frame
To remove the inverter board

- Remove the 2 screws and separate the board from the unit
To remove the ACDC board
6-13

- Remove the four screws in ACDC board

- Disconnect the cable from the AC inlet
- Lift up ACDC
To remove the module interface

board
- Disconnect the cable from from the module interface board
- Remove 2 screws and then remove the module interface

board
6-14

Disassembly
2.7 To disassemble the extended rack and the recorder

To remove the recorder
- Use the flat blade screwdriver to press the
lock through the hole inside.
- Pulling the recorder out at the same time
To open the extended rack box

- Remove the 5 screws on the box
- Lift the cover up
To remove the rac flex cable
6-15

- Remove the three screws, then remove off the

board
To disassemble the recorder

- Remove the paper from the recorder
- Remove 2 screws inside the recorder
Reassemble the module in reverse order.
6-16

Disassembly
2.8 Handling and storage of display component

Handling of display component and protective window
If the Display component surface becomes dusty, wipe it gently with absorbent cotton,
chamois or other soft material. If necessary, breathe onto the display surface and wipe
immediately. The display surface may also be cleaned using a small amount of normal hexane.
Do not use acetone, toluene or alcohol because they cause chemical damage to the polarizer.
1. Wipe off saliva and water drops as soon as possible. Their prolonged contact with the
polarizer cause deformations and color fading.
2. Do not open the component case because internal circuits are sensitive to electrostatic
discharges.
Placing a spare part Display component or a display shield into use:
Peel off the protective film slowly (in more than 10 seconds) from the display or protective
window surface. Fast peeling may generate enough static electricity to destroy the Display
component.
Storaging an display component as a spare part for a long period
1. Store the display in a dark place. Do not expose it to sunlight or fluorescent light. Keep the
temperature between -30 °C and 85 °C / -22 °F and 185 °F at 5% to 95% humidity.
2. The polarizer surface should not come into contact with any other object. It is
recommended that the display unit is stored in the container in which it was originally
shipped.
2.9 To replace the fuses

Pull out the fuse holder under the mains connector at the back of the monitor. Replace the
fuses with fuses of exactly the same type and rating.
To change the fuses
- Use the screwdraft to press the fuse
holder
- Prize and pull the holder out

- Replace the fuse with correct type and
rating
2.10 To download the software

Refer to the instruction in Software’s FRU, follow the instruction for downloading service
software.
6-17

6-18

7 Technical
specification
General Specifications
1 General Specifications
1.1 Genenral specifications
Size
Without extension module 312±5 mm (H) * 312±5 mm (W) * 158±5 mm (D)
With extension module 312±5 mm (H) * 352±5 mm (W) * 178±5 mm (D)
Weight
With extension module ≤ 7 kg
Monitor Environment
Operating temperature Normal operation: 5 to 40°C (41 to 104°F)
Charging batteries: 5 to 35°C (41 to 95°F)
Storage and transport -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
temperature
Operating humidity 20 to 90% noncondensing
Storage and transport 10 to 90% noncondensing
humidity
Operating atmospheric 700 to 1060 hPa
pressure (525 to 795 mmHg)
Storage and transport 700 to 1060 hPa
atmospheric pressure (525 to 795 mmHg)
E-miniC module Environment
Operating temperature 10 to 40°C (50 to 104°F)
Non-operating -25 to 70°C (-13 to 158°F)
temperature
Non-operating humidity 10 to 95% noncondensing
Operating altitude 666 to 1060 mbar
E-sCAiO, E-sCO, N-CAiO modules Environment
temperature
Operating altitude 660 to 1060 mbar
E-Entropy module Environment
7-1


temperature
Electrical
AC input voltage 100 to 240 V ±10%
AC input frequency 50/60 Hz
AC input power ≤ 150 VA
Power supply Internal battery or AC power
Power cord type cord connector IEC/EN 60320-1/C13
For USA, difference type of plugs should be used for connection to the alternate
voltage 13 A 125 V or 6 A 250 V.
Fuse 250 V, 2.5 Ah
Battery Exchangeable lithium-ion, 2 pcs max.
Battery life 300 cycles minimum to 50% capacity
Battery information model SM 201-6; 11.1 V, 3.52 Ah
Charging time 2 hours per battery pack
Operation time Up to 4.5 hours
Recorder
Power comsumption Standby: ≤ 1.2 W
Printing: ≤ 10 W
Recorder type Thermal array
Resolution Vertical 8 dots/mm (200 dots/inch)
in non-waveform mode
Horizontal 24 dots/mm (600 dots/inch)
mimimum in waveform mode
Paper width 50 mm, printing width 48 mm
Waveforms Selectable 1, 2, or 3 waveforms
Print speed 1, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/s
7-2

General Specifications
1.2 Defibrillator synchronization connector

NOTE: In the defibrillator synchronization connector, Pin 1,2,3,4,7 are grounding.
Synchronization pulse (Pin 5)

Pulse width: 10 ±20% ms positive pulse
Delay: < 35 ms (R-wave peak to leading edge of pulse)
Amplitude: CMOS compatible
3.5 V min. at 1 mA sourcing
0.5 V max. at 5 mA sinking
Output impedance: 200 Ω
7-3

2 Parameters specifications
2.1 ECG specifications
Leads available 3-lead configuration: I, II, III

5-lead configuration: I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF and VA
QRS detection range 0.5 to 5mV
QRS detection width (Q to 40 to 120 ms
S)
Defibrillation protection 5000 V, 360 J
Recovery time <5 s
Input impedance Common mode > 10 MΩ @ 50/60 Hz
Differential > 2.5 MΩ from 0.67 to 40 Hz
Common mode rejection 90 dB minimum at 50 Hz
Tall T wave rejection >1.4 mV
ECG leads off detection Active patient electrode: <30 nA
Reference electrode: <300 nA
Filter modes
50/60 Hz
Monitoring filter 0.5 to 40 Hz
ST filter 0.05 to 40 Hz
Dagnostic filter 0.05 to 150 Hz
Heart rate
Measurement range 30 to 300 bpm
Measurement accuracy ±5 % or ±5 bpm, whichever is greater
resolution 1 bpm
Heart rate response time (ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1f)
Step increase from 80 to average 6.9 s (6.5 to 7.5 s)
120 bpm
Step decrease from 80 to average 8.2 s, (7.6 to 10.0 s)
40 bpm
The heart rate calculation operates with irregular rhythms of ANSI/AAMI
EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1e, the heart rate after a 20 second stabilization period
is:
Figure 3a 80 bpm
Figure 3b 59 bpm
Figure 3c 122 bpm
7-4

Parameters specifications
Figure 3d 117 bpm

Heart rate averaging computation (ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1d): Aver-
age of 10 second median values
The average time and time range ( ) to alarm (VFib or VTachy) for
tachycardia waveform are as follows (ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.2.1g)
Figure 4a halved ampli- 9.9 s (8.4 to 11.5 s)
tude:
Figure 4a 7.1 s (5.8 to 8.2 s)
normal amplitude:
Figure 4a 4.4 s (4.2 to 4.6 s)
doubled amplitude:
Figure 4b halved ampli- 7.0 s (6.1 to 7.5 s)
tude:
Figure 4b 5.8 s (4.5 to 7.4 s)
normal amplitude:
Figure 4b 6.1 s (5.1 to 7.0 s)
doubled amplitude:
ST
ST numeric range -9 to 9 mm (-0.9 to 0.9 mV)
ST numeric accuracy ±0.2 mm or ±10%, whichever is greater (within the
range of -8 to 8 mm)
ST numeric resolution 0.1 mm
Pacemaker detection
Input voltage range 2 to 700 mV
Input pulse width 0.5 to 2 ms
Input overshoot Specified for both Method A and Method B required
in ANSI/AAMI EC13-2002 Section 4.1.4.2
Pacer pulse rejection of 2.0 V/s (according to the test defined in ANSI/AAMI
fast ECG signals EC13-2002 Section 4.1.4.3)
NOTE: Pacemaker detector may not operate correctly during the use of high-frequency (HF)
surgical equipment. The disturbances of HF surgical equipment typically cause false positive
pacer detection.
Direct cardiac application:

The display area reserved for the ECG measurement in the monitoring system screen may not
be adequate for displaying the complete ECG amplitude when measuring ECG direct from the
surface of the heart. Clipping of the signal can be reduced by adjusting the size of the signal on
the screen (for example, from the default 1.0 to 0.2) in the ECG menu.
7-5

2.2 Impedance respiration specifications
Measurement range 4 to 120 resp/min

Measurement accuracy ±5% or ±5 resp/min, whichever is greater
Nomalized respiration ≤ 5.0 µA
sensing current
Impedance respiration 31.25 kHz
carrier frequency
2.3 GE TruSignal SpO2 specifications
Measurement and display 1 to 100%

range
Calibrated against functional oxygen saturation.
Measurement accuracy
Adult/Pediatric without motion:
(100 to 70%): ±2 digits (±3 digits with ear sensor)
with motion: ±3 digits
low perfusion: ±3 digits
Neonatal without motion: ±3 digits
(100 to 70%): with motion: ±3 digits
Adult/Pediatric/Neonat unspecified
al (69 to 1%):
Display resolution 1 digit (1% of SpO2)
Display averaging Normal 12s, Fast 3s
Wavelength of SpO2 probe Infrared LED 940 nm
LEDs: RedLED 660 nm
Maximum energy of SpO2 Infrared LED 42 µJ/pulse
probe LEDs: Red LED 62 µJ/pulse
NOTE: This information may be useful to clinicians, such as those performing photodynamic therapy.
Pulse rate
Measurement and display 30 to 250 bpm
range
Display resolution 1 bpm
Without motion: ±2 bpm (Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal)
With motion: ±3 bpm (Adult/Pediatric/Neonatal)
Low Perfusion: ±5 bpm (Adult/Pediatric)
7-6

Table 1: Accuracy for sensors (Arms) *
GE SpO2 Sensor Non motion Motion Low perfusion Low perfusion

(70-100%) (70-100%) (70-100%)** (70-100%)**
OXY-E-UN, TS-E-D, TS-E2-GE, TS-E4-GE ±3 digits unspecified unspecified unspecified
OXY-SE-3, TS-SE-3 ±2 digits unspecified unspecified unspecified
OXY-F-UN, TS-F-D, TS-F2-GE, TS-F4-GE, ±2 digits unspecified ±3 digits ±3 digits
TS-SA-D, TS-SA4-GE
OXY-W-UN, TS-W-D ±2 digits unspecified unspecified unspecified
OXY-AP-10, OXY-AP-25, TS-AP-10, ±2 digits ±3 digits unspecified unspecified
TS-AP-25
OXY-AF-10, TS-AF-10, TS-AF-25 ±2 digits ±3 digits unspecified unspecified
* Because SpO2 measurements are statistically distributed, only about 2/3 of the measurements can be expected to fall
within ±1 Arms of the value measured by a CO-oximeter
Test methods used to establish SpO2 accuracy: GE TruSignal SpO2 measurement have been validated for no motion and
motion accuracy in a controlled hypoxia studies with healthy non-smoking adult volunteers over the specified SpO2 rage.
SpO2 readings were compared to SaO2 values of drawn blood samples measured by CO-oximetry. Subjects comprised
both adult men and women and spanned a range of skin pigmentation.
** GE TruSignal technology have been validated for low perfusion SpO2 accuracy over the specified range in a bench top
testing against BioTek Index 2 patient simulator with 0.3% signal amplitude.
Table 2: The table below shows Arms values measured using GE SpO2 sensors with
GE CARESCAPETM V100 in a clinical study.*
GE SpO2 Sensor 70 - 80% 80 - 90% 90 - 100%
OXY-E 2.3 digits 1.4 digits 1.3 digits
OXY-SE 2.5 digits 2.0 digits 1.1 digits
OXY-F 1.3 digits 1.0 digits 1.1 digits
OXY-W 2.9 digits 1.8 digits 1.0 digits
OXY-AP 2.0 digits 1.9 digits 1.7 digits
OXY-AF 2.5 digits 1.4 digits 0.9 digits
* The sensors were clinically tested for accuracy with the following sensors: OXY-E (equivalent to OXY-E-UN, TS-E-D,
TS-E2-GE, TS-E4-GE), OXY-SE (equivalent to OXY-SE-3, TS-SE-3), OXY-F (equivalent to OXY-F-UN, TS-F-D, TS-F2-GE,
TS-F4-GE, TS-SA-D, TS-SA4-GE), OXY-W (equivalent to OXY-W-UN, TS-W-D), OXY-AP (equivalent to OXY-AP-10, OXY-AP-25,
TS-AP-10, TS-AP-25), OXY-AF (equivalent to OXY-AF-10, TS-AF-10, TS-AF-25).
The sensors were clinically tested for neonatal accuracy with the following sensors: OXY-SE (equivalent to OXY-SE-3,
TS-SE-3), OXY-AF (equivalent to OXY-AF-10, TS-AF-10, TS-AF-25).
7-7

2.4 Nellcor SpO2 specifications
Measurement range 1 to 100%

Display range 0 to 100%
Measurement accuracy Adult 100 to 70% ±2 digits
Neo 100 to 70% ±3 digits
Low perfusion 100 to 70% ±2 digits
Display resolution 1% of SpO2
Display averaging 2 to 7 seconds
Pulse rate
range
Measurement accuracy ±3 digits
Sensor Light Source
Wavelength Infrared: 900 nm
Red: 660 nm
Total optical output power less than 15 mW
of the sensor LEDs
* This information may be useful to clinicians, such as those performing photodynamic therapy.
2.5 Masimo SpO2 specifications
Measurement range 1 to 100%

Display range 0 to 100%
Without motion Adult/Pediatric 100 to 70% ±2 digits
Neonate 100 to 70% ±3 digits
With motion Adult/Ped/Neo 100 to 70% ±3 digits
Low perfusion 100 to 70% ±2 digits
0~69% unspecified
Display resolution 1% of SpO2
Display averaging 2 to 16 seconds
Pulse rate
7-8


range
Measurement accuracy Without motion ±3 bpm
With motion ±5 bpm
Sensor Light Source
Wavelength Infrared: 905 nm (nominal)
Red: 660 nm (nominal)
Power Dissipation Infrared: 22.5 mW (max)
Red: 27.5 mW (max)
* This information may be useful to clinicians, such as those performing photodynamic therapy.
2.6 NIBP
Measurement technique Oscillometric with step deflation

Supported modes Manual, automatic and stat
Measurement time Adult/Pediatric inflate duration time less than 120 s
Neonate cycle time less than 85 s
Measurement ranges
Systolic Adult/Pediatric: 30 to 290 mmHg
Neonate: 30 to 140 mmHg
MAP Adult/Pediatric: 20 to 260 mmHg
Diastolic Adult/Pediatric: 10 to 220 mmHg
Accuracy According to AAMI SP10-2002 4.4.5.2 B, accuracy of
NIBP parameter was validated against the
intra-arterial method 1.
Default initial inflation Adult/Pediatric: 135 ± 15 mmHg
pressure Neonate: 100 ± 15 mmHg
Over pressure allowed by Adult/Pediatric: 300 ± 6 to 330 mmHg
independent safety Neonate: 150 ± 3 to 165 mmHg
controller
1. Blood pressure measurements determined with this device are equivalent to those
obtained by an intra-arterial blood pressure measurement device, within the limits
prescribed by the American National Standard, Manual, electronic, or automated
sphygmomanometers
7-9

2.7 Invasive blood pressure
Measurement range -40 to 320 mmHg (-5.3 to 42.7 kPa)

Measurement accuracy ±5% or ±2 mmHg, whichever is greater
Frequency response 4 to 22 Hz
Transducer sensitivity 5 µV/V/mmHg
Pulse rate
Range 30 to 250 bpm
Accuracy ±5% or ±5 bpm, whichever is greater
Zero adjustment range ± 150 mmHg
2.8 Temperature
Measurement units ° Fahrenheit (F)

° Celsius (C)
Measurement range 10 to 45°C (50 to 113°F)
Measurement accuracy ± 0.1°C without temperature sensor
Display resolution ± 0.1°C at 25 to 45 °C with reusable probes
Probe types supported Use only GE Healthcare recommend temperature
YSI probes.
Temperature self-check At start-up and then every 10 minutes
Probe type time response
Reusable skin temperature 3 s
probe:
Reusable adult central 6s
temperature probe:
Reusable pediatric central 4s
temperature probe:
Disposable skin 3 to 6 s
temperature probe:
Disposable central 5 to 8 s
temperature probe, 12F:
Disposable central 5 to 8 s
temperature probe, 9F:
7-10

2.9 Airway gases
Accuracy specifications apply in normal conditions after a 30 min warm-up period:

Ambient temperature 18 to 28°C, within ±5°C of calibration
Ambient pressure 660 to 1060 hPa, ±67 hPa of calibration
Ambient humidity 20 to 80%, within ±20% RH of calibration
Sampling rate
E-miniC module • 150 ±25 ml/min (sampling line 2 to 3 m, normal
conditions)
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • 120 ±20 ml/min
Warm-up time
E-miniC module • 1 minute for operation, 30 minutes for full
specification
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • 1 minute for operation with CO2, O2 and N2O,
5 minutes for operation of anesthetic agents,
20 minutes for full specification
Respiration rate
Measurement range
E-miniC module • 4 to 80 breaths/min
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • 4 to 100 breaths/min
E-miniC module • 4 to 20 breaths/min: ±1 breaths/min
20 to 80 breaths/min: ±5%
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • 4 to 20 breaths/min: ±1 breaths/min
20 to 100 breaths/min: ±5%
Resolution 1 breaths/min
CO2
CO2 measurement range
E-miniC module • 0 to 20 vol%
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • 0 to 15 vol%
CO2 measurement accuracy
E-miniC module
• 0 to 15 vol%:
± (0.2 vol% + 2% of reading)
• 15 to 20 vol%:
± (0.7 vol% + 2% of reading)
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • ± (0.2 vol% + 2% of reading)
CO2 display resolution 0.1%, 0.1kpa or 1 mmHg
7-11

CO2 total system response time

E-miniC module
• < 2.4 seconds with a 3m sampling line
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • < 3.3 seconds with a 2 or 3m sampling line
CO2 rise time
E-miniC module • < 300 ms with nominal flow
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module • < 260 ms with 120 ml/min sampling rate and 2 or
3m sample line
CO2 drift < 0.1 vol%
O2
O2 measurement range 0 to 100 vol%
O2 measurement accuracy ± (1 vol% + 2% of reading)
O2 display resolution 1% for values under -10% and over 10%
0.1 for values between -9.9…9.9%
O2 total system response time < 3.3 seconds with a 2 or 3m sampling line
O2 rise time < 260 ms
O2 drift < 0.3 vol%
N2O
N2O measurement range 0 to 100 vol%
N2O measurement accuracy 0 to 85 vol%: ± (2 vol% + 2% of reading)
85 to 100 vol%: ± (2 vol% + 8 % of reading)
N2O display resolution 1%
N2O total system response time < 3.4 seconds with a 2 or 3m sampling line
N2O rise time < 320 ms with 120 ml/min sampling rate and 2 or 3m
sample line
N2O drift < 0.3 vol%
Anesthetic agents
Anesthetic agents specified Hal, Enf, Iso: 0 to 6 vol%
measurement range Sev: 0 to 8 vol%
Des: 0 to 20 vol%
Anesthetic agents ± (0.15 vol% + 5% of reading)
measurement accuracy
Anesthetic agents display 0.01% for values between 0…1%
resolution 0.1% for values equal or above 1%
Anesthetic agents total system < 3.5 seconds with a 2 or 3m sampling line (< 3.8 for
response time Hal)
7-12

Anesthetic agents rise time Hal, Enf, Iso, Des: < 420 ms with a 3 m sampling line
Hal: < 800 ms with a 3 m sampling line
Hal, Enf, Iso, Des: < 700 ms with a 6 m sampling line
Hal: < 1800 ms with a 6 m sampling line
Hal drift < 0.1 vol%
Enf drift < 0.1 vol%
Iso drift < 0.1 vol%
Sev drift < 0.1 vol%
Des drift < 0.3 vol%
Effects of interfering gases and vapors
E-miniC module
Non-disturbing gases of which - Ethanol C2H5OH (<0.3%)
effect on CO2 (5 vol%) readings - Acetone (<0.1% )
< 0.2 vol%:
- Methane CH4 (<0.2%)
- Nitrogen N2 (0-100%)
- water vapor (0-100%)
- Trichloromonofluoromethane (<1%)
- Dichlorotetrafluoroethane (<1%)
- Dichlorofluromethane (<1%)
Disturbing gas and its effect • Halotane (4%): increases CO2 (5 vol%) < 0.3 vol%
• Isoflurane (5%): increases CO2 (5 vol%) < 0.4 vol%
• Enflurane (5%): increases CO2 (5 vol%) < 0.4 vol%
• Desflurane (24%): increases CO2 (5 vol%) < 1.2
vol%
• Sevoflurane (6%): increases CO2 (5 vol%) < 0.4 vol%
• N2O (40%): increases CO2 (5 vol%) < 0.4 vol%
• Helium (50%): decreases CO2 (5 vol%) < 0.3 vol%
• If O2 compensation is not activated: O2 (40-95%)
decreases < 0.3 vol%
• If O2 compensation is activated: O2 (40-95%) error
< 0.15 vol%
• If N2O compensation is not activated: N2O
(40-80%) increases < 0.8 vol%
• If N2O compensation is activated: N2O (40-80%)
error < 0.3 vol%
E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO module
7-13

Non-disturbing gases:
- Ethanol C2H5OH (< 0.036%)
- Acetone (< 0.2%)
- Methane CH4 (< 0.3%)
- Isopropanol (< 0.48%)
- Nitrogen N2
- Carton Monoxide CO (< 100 ppm)
- Nitrous Oxide NO (< 200 ppm)
- Freon R134A (< 1%) (for CO2, O2 and N2O)
- Water vapor
Effects of a non-disturbing gas • CO2 < 0.2 vol%
to the measured gas
concentrations • N2O < 2 vol%
• O2 < 2 vol%
• Anesthetic agents < 0.15 vol%
Gas cross effects • Helium (50 vol%):
Decreases CO2 (5 vol%) readings < 0.5 vol%
Decreases O2 (50 vol%) readings < 2 vol%
• Xenon (80 vol%):
Decreases CO2 (5 vol%) readings < 0.5 vol%
Decreases O2 (14 vol%) readings <1.5 vol%
NOTE: E-miniC measurement is intended for patients weighing over 5 kg (11 lb).
2.10 Entropy
Display range
Response Entropy (RE) 0 to 100
State Entropy (SE) 0 to 91
Burst Supression Ratio (BSR) 0 to 100%
Display accuracy ±1 or ±1%
Amplifier 1 MΩ @ 50 Hz
input impedance
Defibrillation protection 3000 V, 130 J
Amplifier frequency range 0.5 to 118 Hz
7-14

8 E-miniC Module
Product overview
1 Product overview
1.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information for the maintenance and service of the E-miniC module. The
module is a single-width plug-in module designed for use with the GE modular monitors.
The E-miniC module provides airway measurements.
Letter C in the module name stands for CO2.
NOTE: E-miniC is intended for patients weighing over 5kg (11lb).
Figure 1 Airway gases setup with E-MiniC Module

1. Module for measuring airway gases
2. Anesthesia gas sampling line
3. Airway adapter with sampling line connector
4. Sampling line connector
Monitor software compatibility

The E-miniC module, is designed for use with VSP-B or later versions respectively.
Equipment safety symbols
- When displayed on the E-miniC module, indicates that airway gases should
be calibrated every six months in normal use and every two months in
continuous use.

1.2.1 CO2 measurement
E-MiniC is a side stream gas analyzer, measuring real time concentrations of CO2. It is a non
dispersive infrared analyzer that measures absorption of the gas sample using an optical
narrow band filter.
8-1

The infrared radiation detector is thermopile.

Concentration of CO2 is calculated from absorption measured at 4.2 to 4.3 μm.
Figure 2 Absorbance of CO2
1.3 Main components

− Gas sampling system
− MiniC measuring unit
− CPU board
8-2

Product overview
1.3.1 Gas sampling system

The sampling system draws a gas sample to the analyzer at a fixed rate.
The gas sampling system samples the measured air to the module, and removes water and
impurities from it. A sampling line is connected to the water trap. The pump draws gas through
the sampling line to the gas measuring unit. After the measurement, the gas is exhausted from
the sample gas out connector.
The sample flow is nominally 150 ml/min.
Figure 3 MiniC block diagram
Mini D-fendTM
The sample is drawn through the sampling line. The gas then enters the module through the
water trap, where it is divided into two flows, a main flow and a side flow. The main flow goes
into the analyzer. This flow is separated from the patient side by a hydrophobic filter. The side
flow creates a slight subatmospheric pressure within the Mini D-fend water trap which causes
fluid removed by the hydrophobic filter to collect in the bottle.
Zero valve
The main flow passes through a magnetic valve before proceeding to the analyzer. This valve is
activated to establish the zero point for the MiniC measuring unit. When the valve is activated,
room air is drawn through a filter into the internal system and the gas sensor.
8-3

NafionTM tube 1)
A Nafion tube is used between the water trap and the zero valve to balance the sample gas
humidity with that of ambient air. The tube prevents errors caused by the effect of water vapor
on gas partial pressure when humid gases are measured after calibration with dry gases.
Gas analyzers
After the zero valve and Nafion tube, the gas passes through the miniC sensor.
Sample flow differential pressure transducer

The sample flow differential pressure transducer measures pressure drop across a restrictor
and calculates the sample flow from the pressure difference.
Working pressure transducer

The working pressure transducer measures differential pressure between the tubing and
ambient air near the miniC sensor. The following messages are based on the obtained pressure
values: ‘Sample line blocked’, ‘Check D-fend’, ‘Replace D-fend’, and ‘Check sample gas outlet’.
Absolute pressure transducer

The absolute pressure transducer measures real-time ambient pressure.
Sampling pump
The gas sampling pump is a membrane pump run by a DC-motor. Sample flow is measured
with a differential pressure transducer across a known restriction. The motor is automatically
controlled to maintain a constant flow even when the D-fend water trap ages and starts to get
occluded. It also enables the use of sample tubes with varying lengths and diameters.
NOTE: In no occasion is the flow reversed towards the patient.
Side flow Sample line

Mini
Main flow D-fend
Filter Room air
Zero
valve
MiniC
Diff. Abs.
Pressure Pressure
Sensor Sensor
Diff.
Pressure
Sensor
minic_fem_gastubing.vsd
Pump
Gas out
Figure 4 Gas tubing layout

1)
1. Nafion is a trademark of Perma Pure Inc.
8-4

Product overview
1.3.2 MiniC sensor

The miniC sensor is a non-dispersive infrared analyzer measuring absorption of the gas sample
at 4.2 to 4.3 μm infrared wavelength, which is selected using an optical narrow band filter. The
IR lamp is a filament surrounded by thermal isolation. There is a hole in the isolation, passing
the radiation to a conical measuring chamber with 3 mm length. From the sample chamber,
the radiation goes into a thermopile detector with an optical filter in front of it.
The temperature sensor measures the miniC measuring unit's temperature and it is used for
temperature compensation.
The miniC sensor is connected to the CPU board and they can’t be replaced separately.
Figure 5 MiniC sensor
1.3.3 CPU board

The CPU board contains a processor, memories and all the analog signal processing needed. A
MiniC measuring unit is attached to the board with a flexible PCB. Also supply voltage and an
RS485 serial channel are connected to the CPU board using another flexible PCB.
Analog signals (CO2, temperature, absolute and differential pressures and lamp current signals)
are fed to the 16-bit A/D converter. The processor controls the A/D converter and calculates
the CO2 percentage and respiration rate from this data.
The processor controls sample flow by adjusting the pump voltage based on the differential
pressure signal. The processor also controls the current of the IR source and keeps it constant.
Calibration data is stored on the EEPROM.
8-5


Table 1 Module bus connector pin description
Module bus connector Pin No. I/O Signal
13 1
1 I RESET RS485
25 14
2 I -15 VDC (not used)
3 I +15 VDIRTY
4 I +15VDC (not used)
5 I/O -DATA RS485
6 I/O DATA RS485
7 Ground and Shield
8 I -RESET RS485
9 n/c
10 n/c
11 n/c
12 n/c
13 Ground and Shield
14 I +24/+32 VDIRTY depends on power supply (not
used)
15 I Ground DIRTY
16 n/c
17 n/c
18 n/c
19 n/c
20 I GASFR (not used)
21 I CTSD (not used)
22 I TXDD (not used)
23 O RXDD (not used)
24 I +5 VDC (not used)
25 I +5 VDC DIRTY (not used)
8-6


To help ensure the equipment remains in proper operational and functional order, adhere to a
good maintenance schedule.
Corrective maintenance
Service personnel should perform the following checkout procedure after any corrective
maintenance, before taking the module back into clinical use:
Required checkout procedure

Performed service activity
Visual inspections Functional check
Front cover replaced All steps Not applicable
Mini D-fend O-rings All steps Check "Gas sampling system
leak test" and "Sample flow
check"
Module casing opened either All steps All steps
for troubleshooting purpose
or for replacing any of the
internal parts.
Planned maintenance
Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure completely every 12 months
after installation:
1. "Replacement of planned maintenance parts"
2. "Visual inspections"
3. "Functional checkout"
The instructions include a check form ("APPENDIX E") which should be filled in when performing
the procedures.
The symbol  in the instructions means that the check form should be signed after
performing the procedure.
2.1 Replacement of planned maintenance parts

2.1.1 Required parts
Replace the following parts that wear in use at the recommended interval.
Part Number Description Pieces Replacement

interval
733382-HEL Nafion Tube 1 Once a year
656565 Mini D-fendTM O-ring 2 Once a year
M1011471 Zero valve air filter 1 Once every 3 years
8-7

It is also recommended to replace the Mini D-fend water trap and the gas sampling line as part
of the planned maintenance procedure.
NOTE: See the supplies and accessories document delivered with the manual for compatible
accessories.
2.1.2 Replacement procedure

Replace the specified planned maintenance parts according to the following procedure. Refer
to “5. Disassembly and reassembly” for more information.
1. Replace the zero valve air filter once every 3 years.
• Use a small flat blade screwdriver to pull the old zero line air filter.
• Attach a new zero line air filter into place.
Nafion tube
Zero line air filter
2. Replace the special tube (Nafion) and check the condition of the internal tubing.
• Replace the 300 mm nafion tube in the sample gas line between the Mini D-fend
water trap and the zero valve unit.
• Check that the tubing inside the module is not contaminated. Any contamination
inside the tubing may indicate that the valve or sensor is contaminated too. This can
increase a risk of faulty operation in valve or sensor. The gas sensor is not possible
to clean in the field. Therefore, replace the whole miniC assembly with a new one.
NOTE: The nafion tube do not include the silicon fittings they connect to. Use the original silicon
fittings unless they are not damaged or leaking.
3. Replace the Mini D-fend O-rings:
• Detach the Mini D-fend.
• Detach the old rubber O-rings that are around the metal Mini D-fend connectors e.g.
using a small flat blade screwdriver. Pay special attention not to scratch the metal
Mini D-fend connectors and thus causing leaking.
• Set the new rubber O-rings into place and attach a new Mini D-fend.
8-8

2.2 Visual inspections

Detach the module from the module slot and check that:
• the front cover panel is intact
• all connectors are intact and attached properly.
• the module box and latch are intact
• the metal D-fend connectors and the D-fend O-rings are clean and intact
• the module and the applied parts are clean
cleaning solutions for the monitor are described in the “B40i User’s Guide”. For details about
accessory package.

2.3 Functional checkout
2.3.1 Test setup
Required tools
− A barometer
− A mass flowmeter for measuring air flow, minimum measurement range 100-300 ml/min,
accuracy 5% or better in the 100-300ml/min range.
− P/N: 755534-HEL Calibration Gas Regulator
− P/N M1006864 Calibration Gas Regulator, (US only)
− P/N: 755580 Calibration gas 5% CO2 and air, package of 4 cans
− P/N 755587 QUICK CAL calibration gas, (US only)
− 3 m / 10 ft gas sampling line
− A pressure manometer with either an integrated or a separate pressure pump
accessories.
Connections
Disconnect the module from the monitor, if connected.
Monitor configuration
1. Configure the CO2 waveform field to the monitor screen.
2. check the CO2 unit: Airway Gas > CO2 Setup > Unit, make sure the unit is mmHg.
2.3.2 Procedure
1. Gas sampling system leak test
Check the gas sampling system for possible leakages.
• Disconnect the module from the monitor.
• Connect a new Mini D-fend water trap to the module.
8-9

• Connect a new gas sampling line to the sampling line connector in the water trap.
• Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to a pressure manometer and a
pressure pump.
• Block the "Sample Gas Out" connector.
• Pump 100 mmHg ± 20 mmHg pressure to the gas sampling system. Let the pressure
stabilize for approximately 10 seconds.
• Check that the pressure reading does not drop more than 6 mmHg during 1 minute.
NOTE: The gas module shall be disconnected from the monitor during the leak test.

2. Sample flow check
Check the sample flow rate.
NOTE: Gas measurement is not available during the first 1 minute after the module is
connected due to warm-up. Message 'Calibrating gas sensor' is shown in the waveform field.
Wait until warm-up is completed before proceeding with the next steps.
• Connect the module with the gas sampling line to the monitor.
• Connect the gas sampling line to the sampling line connector in the water trap.
• Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to a flowmeter.
• Check the sample flow rate reading from the flowmeter. The flow rate shall be within
the specification limit 150 ± 25 ml/min.
NOTE: Readjustment is needed, if the measured value is not within the specification limits.
Adjust the sample gas flow rate according to the instructions in section “3.1. Sample flow rate
adjustment”.
NOTE: If the sampling pump is noisy it indicates possible problems with motor bearing. In this
case it is recommended to replace the noisy sampling pump with a new one.

3. Zero valve operation
Test the zero valve functionality.
• Connect the gas regulator to the calibration gas container.
• Connect the end of the gas sampling line to the regulator on the gas container.
Leave the regulator overflow port open to room air.
• Enter to gas service menu: select Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) >
Service (26-23-8) > Parameters > Gas Unit > Gases.
• Start feeding calibration gas. Wait until the CO2 value rises to approximately 5%.
• Open the zero valve to room air by selecting Zero valve ctrl.
• Check that the CO2 values drop back near 0%.
• Stop feeding the calibration gas.
8-10

• Turn the zero valve back to the normal measurement position by selecting ZERO to
MEAS.

4. Gas calibration
Perform gas calibration according to the instructions in section “3.2. Gas calibration”.

5. Ambient pressure
Use a barometer to check the operation of the absolute pressure sensor.
• Check that the ambient pressure value shown in the Gas service menu does not
differ more than ± 13.33 mbar from the value shown by the barometer.

6. Occlusion detection
• Block the tip of the sampling line by your finger.
• Check that message 'Sample line blocked' appears to the parameter window within
30 seconds.

7. Air leak detection
• Detach the Mini D-fend water trap.
• Check that message 'Check D-Fend' appears to the parameter window within 30
seconds.

8. Airway gases
• Breathe a minimum of 5 times to the tip of the sampling line.
• Check that a normal CO2 waveform appears to the waveform field and the EtCO2
and FiCO2 values are updated to the parameter window.

9. Apnea detection
• Stop breathing to the gas sampling line.
• Check that an 'Apnea' alarm appears to the message field within 30 seconds.
8-11

2.3.3 Test completion

• Fill in all necessary documents.
8-12

Calibration and adjustments
3 Calibration and adjustments

3.1 Sample flow rate adjustment
Sample flow rate shall be adjusted:
• if the sample flow rate check in section “2.3. Functional checkout” failed.
3.1.1 Calibration setup

Required tools
− A mass flowmeter for measuring air flow, minimum measurement range 100-300 ml/min,
accuracy 5% or better in the 100-300 ml/min range.
− 3 m / 10 ft Gas sampling line
accessories
NOTE: Use only accurate, properly maintained, calibrated and traceable calibration tools for
the parameter calibration to ensure measurement accuracy.
NOTE: Refer to the flowmeter documentation for user instructions.
Connections
• Ensure that the module is connected to the monitor.
• Ensure that you have a new Mini D-fend water trap in use.
• Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to the flow meter.
NOTE: Before checking or adjusting the sample flow rate, make sure there is no leakage in the
sampling system.
3.1.2 Sample flow rate adjustment

1. Enter to gas service menu: select Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) > Service
(26-23-8) > Parameters > Gas Unit > Gases.
2. Select Sample gain adj
3. Adjust the sample flow to the nominal value 150 ml/min by using the Trim knob to scroll
gain value up-down:
• To decrease the sample flow rate measured by the flow meter by approximately 7.5
ml/min, add gain value by 0.05.
• To increase the sample flow rate measured by the flow meter by approximately 7.5
ml/min, lower the gain value by 0.05.
4. Press Trim Knob to confirm the gain adjustment. Wait until the sample flow value shown
returns near to the nominal value 150 ml/min and then check the actual measured flow
rate from the flow meter.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the flow meter shows a 150 ± 25 ml/min flow rate.
NOTE: Adjust the flow rate according to the reading in the flow meter. The flow rate reading in
the Gases menu is measured by the internal electronics and settles always back to the nominal
150 ml /min independent on the real flow rate.
8-13

3.2 Gas calibration

Gas calibration shall be performed:
• each time planned maintenance is performed.
• each time corrective maintenance is performed.
NOTE: Gas calibration is a normal user action. Refer to the B40i monitor user’s guide for the
recommendation for gas calibration interval in clinical use.

Required tools
− P/N M1006864 Calibration Gas Regulator, (US only)
− P/N: 755580 Calibration gas 5% CO2 and air, package of 4 cans
− 3 m / 10 ft Gas sampling line
− P/N 755587 QUICK CAL calibration gas, (US only)
accessories.
NOTE: Use only the specified GE Healthcare calibration gas for the gas calibration to ensure
measurement accuracy. Do not use any other calibration gases. Check the calibration gas
container's labelling to ensure that the calibration gas has not expired.
NOTE: Ensure that the gas regulator is functioning properly before gas calibration. Refer to the
gas regulator's "Instructions for Use" letter for the annual maintenance instructions.
Connections
1. Ensure that the module is connected to the monitor.
2. Ensure that you have a new Mini D-fend water trap in use.
3. Connect the gas regulator to the calibration gas container.
4. Connect a new gas sampling line to the sampling line connector in the water trap.
5. Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to the regulator on the gas container.
Figure 6 Connecting a gas regulator to the calibration gas container and

connecting a sampling line to the gas regulator.
8-14

3.2.2 Procedure
NOTE: Gas calibration is not available during the first 5 minutes after the module is connected.
For maximum accuracy, let the monitor to warm up for 30 minutes before starting calibration.
NOTE: Gas calibration is not available during a 'Sample line blocked', 'Check D-Fend' and
'Check sample gas out’ alarm condition. Resolve the alarm condition before starting
calibration.
1. Enter to gas calibration menu: Airway Gas > Gas Calibration
2. The monitor will start automatic zeroing of the gas sensors. Wait until the message
'Zeroing' is replaced by a message 'Zero OK' message.
3. Open the regulator after a message 'Feed gas' is shown. The measured gas
concentrations are shown in real-time in the gas calibration menu.
Continue feeding the calibration gas until the measured gas concentrations are stabilized
and a message 'Adjust' is shown. Close the regulator.
4. Use the Trim Knob to adjust the gas readings shown in the Calibration menu to match
with the gas readings in the labelling of the calibration gas container. Press Trim Knob to
accept the adjusted values when the gas readings match each other.
5. Wait until a message 'Ok' is shown. NOTE: A message 'Zero error' is shown in case the
zeroing fails.
NOTE: A message 'Calibr.error' is shown, if you do not start feeding gas within 1 minute after
the automatic zeroing is completed, or if the calibration fails due to too large gain adjustment.
NOTE: If zeroing or calibration failed, select the Recalibrate to restart the calibration procedure
from the beginning.
8-15

4 Troubleshooting
The problems and solutions in this chapter represent only a few of the faults that you may
NOTE: Perform the checkout procedure described in chapter “2. Maintenance and checkout”
each time after you have opened the module casing.

Before beginning any detailed troubleshooting, complete thorough visual inspection to be sure
that:
• the front cover is intact
• the water trap connection and disconnection functions properly
• all connectors are intact, clean and are attached properly
• the metal D-fend connectors and the D-fend O-rings are clean and intact
• Check if there are any messages shown in the message field. Find the possible cause and
solution from the “Messages” section in "User’s Guide" .
• Check that the module in doubt is compatible with the monitor.
• Check to the accessories used with the module. If in doubt, replace the accessories with
known good ones.
If in doubt of having any loose parts or cable connections inside the module, detach the
module box by removing the four screws from the back of the module and check that:
• tubes are not pinched and there are no sharp bends on them
• all tubes are connected properly
• there are no loose objects inside the module
8-16

Troubleshooting
4.2 Troubleshooting checklist

The following simple troubleshooting hints may help you to localize and isolate a functional
problem to the correct unit. Ensure that the monitor is turned on and the module is connected.
4.2.1 Gas sampling system troubleshooting

• Faults which can occur in the sampling system are: leaks or blockages in the tubing,
failure of the sampling pump or the magnetic valves, or diminishing of the flow rates
because of dirt or other matter accumulating in the internal tubing.
• Whenever suspecting the sampling system and always after having done any work on
the sampling system, check the sampling system for leakages and check the flow rate.
• The D-fend Pro water trap should be replaced, when the 'Replace D-Fend' message
appears.
• If any liquid has entered the IR sensor due to water trap filter failure, contact GE
Healthcare service.
• If the sampling pump is noisy it indicates possible problems with motor bearing. In this
case it is recommended to replace the noisy sampling pump with a new one.
• Check that the tubing inside the module is not contaminated. Any contamination inside
the tubing may indicate that the valve or sensor is contaminated, too. This can increase a
risk of faulty operation in valve or sensor. The gas sensor is not possible to clean in the
field. Therefore, replace the whole miniCO2 assembly with a new one.
NOTE: All internal tubes are mechanically fragile. Sharp bends may cause leaks and occlusions.
4.2.2 MiniC sensor troubleshooting

• The CPU contains factory calibration data for the miniC sensor. Thus, they can't be
replaced separately in the field. In case of failure, the complete miniCO2 assembly should
be replaced.
If the problem remains, contact service.
8-17

4.3 Troubleshooting charts

too low ETCO2 value • sudden decrease in circulation • check all connections
• pulmonary embolism • check calibration
• hyperventilation
• very large dead-space
• large shunting
• leak in sampling system
• calibration error
• high by-pass flow from ventilator
too high ETCO2 • hypoventilation • change D-fend
• increased metabolism • check calibration
• D-fend contaminated
• calibration error
waveform clipped • incorrect scaling • change scale
no response to breathing • apnea • check all connections
• (disconnection)
• sampling line or water trap loose or
blocked (air leak)
• sample gas outlet blocked • check that outlet is open
ETCO2 over scale >20% • abnormally high ETCO2 (permissive • let the module run without a
Shown until 32%, hypercapnia) sampling line until the CO2
specified range 0...20% • CO2 sensor contaminated sensor has dried out
• D-fend malfunction
• change D-fend
ETCO2>PaCO2 • unit is mmHg or kPa and ETCO2 is close to • change to “wet gas” by using
arterial PCO2 install/service menu
• “dry gas” as default
Abnormally high (or low) • Pressure transducer failure. • Replace miniCO2 assembly.
response to CO2, or
sudden occlusion
message.
Unable to perform gas • Gas calibration is not available during the • Wait until warm-up is
calibration. first 5 minute after the module is completed.
connected.
• Gas calibration is not available during • Resolve the alarm condition
‘Sample line blocked’, ‘Check D-fend’, and before starting calibration.
‘Check sample gas out’ alarm condition.
8-18

Disassembly and reassembly
5 Disassembly and reassembly

5.1 Disassembly guidelines
Field service of the module is limited to replacing the serviceable parts listed below (see also
chapter “6. Service parts”). Attempting a field repair on any other parts could jeopardize the
safe and effective operation of the module, and void the warranty.
5.1.1 Serviceable parts

• The miniCO2 assembly, including the following components (CPU board, mini CO2 sensor,
pump unit, tubing unit and zero valve and pressure transducers)
• tubing unit
• pump unit
• zero valve
• air filter
• Mini D-fend O-rings
• Nafion tube
• Mini D-fend
• mechanical parts listed in the service parts chapter
5.1.2 Service limitations

The following parts are not serviceable:
• miniC sensor and CPU board can't be replaced separately.
NOTE: The CPU contains factory calibration data for the miniC sensor. In case of failure, the
complete miniCO2 assembly should be replaced. Attempts to repair or calibrate the unit
elsewhere will adversely affect operation of the unit. The information provided in this document
is for reference only.
5.1.3 ESD precautions

All external connectors of the module are designed with protection from ESD damage.
However, if the module requires service, exposed components and assemblies inside are
susceptible to ESD damage. This includes human hands, non-ESD protected work stations or
improperly grounded test equipment. The following guidelines may not guarantee a 100%
static-free workstation, but can greatly reduce the potential for failure of any electronic
assemblies being serviced:
• Discharge any static charge you may have built up before handling semiconductors or
assemblies containing semiconductors.
• A grounded, antistatic wristband or heel strap should be worn at all times while handling
or repairing assemblies containing semiconductors.
• Use properly grounded test equipment.
8-19

• Use a static-free work surface while handling or working on assemblies containing

semiconductors.
• Do not remove semiconductors or assemblies containing semiconductors from antistatic
containers until absolutely necessary.
• Do not slide semiconductors or electrical/electronic assemblies across any surface.
• Do not touch semiconductor leads unless absolutely necessary.
• Semiconductors and electronic assemblies should be stored only in antistatic bags or
boxes.
• Handle all PCB assemblies by their edges.
• Do not flex or twist a circuit board.
5.1.4 Before disassembly

• Note the positions of any sampling tubes, wires or cables. Mark them if necessary to
ensure that they are reassembled correctly.
5.1.5 Tools needed
- pozidrive screwdrivers
- flat blade screwdriver
- pincers
- antistatic wristband
5.2 Disassembly and reassembly procedure

Disassembling the airway module (see the exploded view of the module in chapter “6. Service
parts”:
1. Remove the two screws from the back of the module.
2. While pressing the release latch, pull the module box slowly backwards and remove it
from the main body.
To reassemble the module, reverse the order of the disassembly steps.
Check that:
• tubes are not pinched and there are no sharp ends on them
8-20

5.2.1 Replacing the pump unit

1. Detach the front cover of the module by releasing the snaps that hold the front cover to
he front chassis unit by using a small flat blade screwdriver. There are 2 snaps on both
sides of the module and 1 snap on the top.
2. Remove the module casing
3. Unplug the two tubes from the back of the front chassis.
4. Detach the front chassis from the metal frame by removing the two screws.
5. Unplug the hose of the pump.
6. Disconnect the pump’s cable from the CPU board.
7. Remove the three screws that connect the pump unit to the board.
To reassemble the module, reverse the order of the dissassembly steps.
Figure 7 Uncovered E-miniC module
5.2.2 Replacing the miniCO2 assembly

he front chassis unit by using a small flat blade screwdriver. There are 2 snaps on both
2. Remove the module casing
3. Unplug the two tubes from the back of the front chassis.
4. Detach the front chassis from the metal frame by removing the two screws.
5. Detach the miniCO2 assy from the frame plate by removing the three screws.
6. Disconnect the FM board from the miniCO2 assy.
To reassemble the module, reverse the order of the dissassembly steps.
8-21

6 Service parts
6.1 Ordering parts
To order parts, Contact GE Healthcare. Contact information is available at
www.gehealthcare.com. Make sure you have all necessary information at hand.
6.2 Spare parts for E-miniC
8-22

Service parts
Item Description Order No.

Mini D-fend, pkg of 10 pcs 8002174
- MiniCO2 assembly, including the following components (CPU board, mini M1013204
CO2 sensor, pump unit, tubing unit and zero valve and pressure
transducers)
1 Module Casing, Single M1021035
2 Front Chassis Unit, E-miniC M1027134
3 M-miniCO2, CONNECTOR FOR D-FEND, MINI CO2 8002173
4 O-RING, O-RING, 2.5x1.6, VITON, SHORE70, BLACK 656565
5 Front Cover, USA, E-miniC M1026941
5 Front Cover, E-miniC M1026943
6 Latch M1021039
7 Torsion Spring M1020935
8 Screw-cross rec. c/s h, stzn, m3x6 *
* Part is not available from GE. Source locally.
8-23


9 Metal frame 879184
10 Frame, E-miniC M1024360
11 Nafion tubing 300 mm 733382-HEL
12 MAGN-VALVE, N.O. valve, 3/2, 5VDC, 0.55W, includes seal 585714
13 Module Connection Flex, E-miniC M1027744
14 Cross cylinder head screw M3x6 *
15 Pump Unit for miniC M1013716
15 Air filter, M-MiniC M1011471
17 Tubing Unit for miniC M1013717
18 Cross cylinder head screw M3x10 *
19 Screw-cross rec.c/s h,m3x8,acidproof *
* Part is not available from GE. Source locally.
8-24

9 E-sCO, E-sCAiO and
N-CAiO Modules
Product overview
1 Product overview
1.1 Introduction
This document provides information for the maintenance and service of the E-sCO, E-sCAiO,
N-CAiO modules. These modules are single width plug-in modules.
The modules provide airway measurements. Letters in the module name stand for:
C = CO2 and N2O, O = patient O2, A = anesthetic agents, and i = agent identification
Table 1 Options for E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO modules
Modules Parameters / measurements Additional measurements

CO2 N2O O2 Anesthetic Agent ID MAC MACage Balance Respiration
agents gas rate
E-sCO X X X X
E-sCAiO X X X X X X X X X
N-CAiO X X X X X X X
Figure 1 Airway gases measurement setup

(1) E-sCO, E-sCAiO or N-CAiO module
(2) Gas sample, gas sampling line connector on the water trap
(3) Gas sampling line
(4) Gas sampling line connector on the airway adapter; place the connector upwards
(5) Airway adapter with sampling line connector
(6) Heat and moisture exchanger with filter (HMEF) (optional)
9-1


1.2.1 CO2, N2O, and agent measurement
MiniTPX is a side stream gas analyzer, measuring real time concentrations of CO2, N2O, and
anesthetic agents (Halothane, Enflurane, Isoflurane, Desflurane, and Sevoflurane).
Figure 2 MiniTPX sensor principle

Anesthetic agents or mixtures of two anesthetic agents are automatically identified, and
concentrations of the identified agents are measured. MiniTPX also detects mixtures of more
than two agents and issues an alarm.
MiniTPX is a non-dispersive infrared analyzer, measuring absorption of the gas sample at
seven infrared wavelengths, which are selected using optical narrow band filters.
The infrared radiation detectors are thermopiles.
Concentrations of CO2 and N2O are calculated from absorption measured at 3-5 μm.
Figure 3 Absorbance of N2O and CO2
9-2

Product overview
Identification of anesthetic agents and calculation of their concentrations is performed by

measuring absorptions at five wavelengths in the 8-9μm band and solving the concentrations
from a set of equations.
Figure 4 Infrared absorbance of AAs

The measuring accuracy is achieved utilizing numerous software compensations. The
compensation parameters are determined individually for each MiniTPX during the factory
calibration.
1.2.2 O2 measurement
The differential oxygen measuring unit uses the paramagnetic principle in a pneumatic bridge
configuration. The signal picked up with a differential pressure transducer unit is generated in
a measuring cell with a strong magnetic field that is switched on and off at a main frequency of
164 Hz. The output signal is a DC voltage proportional to the O2 concentration difference
between the gas to be measured and the air reference.
Figure 5 O2 measurement principle
9-3

1.3 Main components

The respiratory modules consist of:
• Gas sampling system
• MiniTPX measuring unit
• MiniOM measuring unit
• CPU board
1.3.1 Controls and connectors
1
2
Figure 6 E-sCAiO, E-sCO, N-CAiO modules

(1) D-fend Pro water trap
(2) Gas sample, sampling line connector on the water trap
(3) Water trap container
(4) Gas exhaust, connector for the gas exhaust line (sampling gas out)
Connector Module Description

D25 connector all modules Module bus connector
1.3.2 Gas sampling system

The gas sampling system draws a 120 ml/min sample from the patient's airway to the module.
The sampling system also takes a 30 ml/min flow of room air to the oxygen sensor. When the
gas sensors are zeroed, room air is taken through the CO2-absorber to the gas sensors instead
of the sampled gas from the patient's breathing.
The gas sampling line is connected between the patient circuit and the Gas Sample port on the
water trap. The water trap protects the sampling system and gas sensors from liquids and
dust.
The diagram of the gas sampling system is shown in the figure below:
9-4

Product overview
Figure 7 Gas sampling system

The sampling system has a self diagnostics that detects disturbances in the gas flow, reveals
the most common reasons for disturbances, such as occluded sampling line or blocked gas
exhaust line, and communicates relevant status messages to the patient monitor.
The system is designed so that gas the sampled gas will not flow from the sampling line back to
the patient circuit. The parts and connections of the sampling system are streamlined for
minimal dead spaces and turbulences in gas flows.
All gas inputs of the module have dust filters protecting the sampling system and gas sensors.
The water trap acts as a dust filter for the sampled gas and the module should always have the
water trap connected.
NOTE: It is very important to prevent dust from entering the open gas connections during
service operations.
D-fend Pro(+) water trap

The gas sampling line is connected to the input of the water trap where a special membrane
passes gases and vapors but stops liquids. The gas flowing through the membrane continues
via the main flow connector of the water trap to the module. The main flow is about 90% of the
sample flow.
Liquids stopped below the membrane are moved to the water container by a side flow that
goes through the water container and the water separation membrane before entering the
side flow connector of the water trap. Thus, the side flow also is free of liquids when it gets into
the module. In the module, the side flow is connected directly to the pump input and it does not
enter the gas sensors.
NOTE: The water trap acts as a dust filter for the sampling system and gas sensors. Thus, the
module should always have the water trap connected.
9-5

Zero valve and CO2 absorber

The zero valve is activated during gas sensor zeroing. Room air is drawn through the
CO2-absorber and the zero valve to the gas sensors, and the main flow of sample gas is
stopped. The zero gas comes to the sensors through the CO2-absorber that chemically absorbs
CO2. The side flow of the water trap flows in the gas sampling line even during zeroing.
During normal monitoring, the zero valve is not activated and the sampled gas gets through
the zero valve to the gas sensors.
Figure 8 Absorber
Nafion tubes 1
The Nafion tube between the water trap and the zero valve equalizes the humidity of the
sampled gas to ambient level. This will prevent calibration errors caused by the difference in
humilities in the sampled breathing gas and the totally dry calibration gas.
Another Nafion tube is used between the CO2 absorber and the zero valve to prevent
condensation of water generated in the CO2 absorber as by-product of CO2-absorption.
Gas sensors
After the zero valve, the gas flows trough the MiniTPX sensor that measures the concentrations
of all gases but oxygen.
The oxygen concentration is measured in the MiniOM sensor that has two inputs. One input
draws in a part of the main flow and the other draws in room air as reference gas for the O2
measurement.
Sample flow differential pressure transducer

The module measures total flow at the input of the gas pump and reference flow at the OM
reference line. The sample flow is the difference of these two flows.
Working pressure transducer

The working pressure transducer measures absolute working pressure between the MiniTPX
unit and MiniOM unit. It is used for messages: ‘Sample line blocked’, ‘Check D-fend’, ‘Replace
D-fend’ and ‘Check sample gas out’.
Pneumatics unit
The pneumatics unit contains the zero valve, the occlusion valve and the pneumatics block
with tubing connections.
1 Nafion is a registered trademark of Perma Pure Inc.
9-6

Product overview
The zero valve is activated during the zero level calibrations of gas sensors. The occlusion valve
is activated when the sampling line or water trap is occluded. With the activated occlusion
valve, the gas pump generates maximal suction trough the “side flow” connector of the water
trap, thus maximizing the transfer of liquids from the wet side of the water trap to the
container.
The pneumatics block contains a network of constrictions to divide the sampled gas in correct
proportions to different parts in the module. The first branching takes place in the water trap
where incoming flow is divided to the “main flow” and “side flow”. The second branching takes
place before the MiniOM sensor.
The pneumatics block also contains a pneumatic low pass filter between gas sensors and gas
pump. The filter consists of constrictions (resistors) and volumes (capacitors) and it attenuates
the pressure pulsation generated in the gas pump so that they do not disturb the operation of
the gas sensors.
Gas pump unit

The gas pump is a membrane pump run by a brushless DC-motor. The pump is adjusted so
that the sample gas flow is kept close to its nominal value even when the flow resistances in
the sampling line of water trap change.
The pump is in a plastic enclosure to minimize the operating noise and mechanical vibration of
the pump unit. A pneumatic damping chamber is integrated to enclosure to attenuate the
pressure pulsation and noise conducted to the gas exhaust port.
Pressure measurements
The four pressure sensors on the CPU board are used to measure ambient pressure, working
pressure of the MiniTPX and MiniOM sensors and pressure of the reference gas flow to the
MiniOM sensor.
Sample flow control

The gas flow in the sampling line is monitored by measuring the gas flow at the input of the gas
pump and the reference flow to the oxygen sensor is estimated by measuring the pressure in
the reference gas flow branch. The sample flow is calculated by subtracting the reference flow
from the total gas flow. A control loop adjusts the rotation speed of the pump motor so that the
gas flow is kept close to 120 ml/min.
Gas sampling self-diagnostics

The sample flow and the vacuum in the sampling system are used for continuous monitoring
of the gas sampling system. The vacuum is calculated in real time as difference of the
measured ambient and working pressures.
9-7

The self-diagnostics of the gas sampling system sends the following status data to the patient
monitor when specific triggering conditions are met: ‘Check D-Fend’, ‘Sample line blocked’,
‘Replace D-Fend’, ‘Check sample gas out’ and ‘Continuous blockage’.
The gas pump is stopped when the 'Sample line blocked' has lasted for more than 1 minute.
The module automatically restarts the pump to check whether the abnormal situation has
been resolved so that normal gas sampling operation is possible.
The gas pump repeats 1 minute full pump, 30 seconds pump off when the ‘Continuous
blockage’ message is shown.
Figure 9 Gas tubing layout
1.3.3 MiniTPX measuring unit

The MiniTPX unit is a non dispersive infrared analyzer, measuring the absorption of the gas
sample at seven infrared wavelengths, which are selected using optical narrow band filters.
The IR source is a micro-machined heating element with an integrated collimator. From the
output of the source, the radiation is passed to a flow optimized measuring chamber.
From the sample chamber, radiation goes via a specially designed beam splitter to two
detectors units, each with four thermopile detectors and integrated optical filters. The miniTPX
measuring unit has two CO2 channels for redundancy purposes. A more detailed description of
the measuring principle can be found in section “1.2.1. CO2, N2O, and agent measurement”.
Each detector unit also measures the unit's temperature. The module CPU uses it for further
processing and temperature compensation of the measured raw signals.
The miniTPX unit includes an amplifier board with the following functions:
• On-board 5V regulator and 2.5V reference source.
• Preamplifiers for the eight thermopile detectors and for the two temperature sensors. A
16 channel buffered multiplexer is used to transfer the signals to the CPU board.
• PWM controlled power for the IR source.
• An EEPROM memory for storing factory calibration coefficients of the sensor.
The input to the amplifier board comprises a 7V DC feed and CPU control signals for the PWM,
the multiplexer and the EEPROM. When the module starts up, the calibration coefficients are
read to the module CPU and then used for calculating the gas concentrations from the raw
data received from the sensor multiplexer.
9-8

Product overview
Figure 10 MiniTPX measuring unit
1.3.4 MiniOM Oxygen sensor

The miniOM sensor measures the concentration of Oxygen in the gas sample.
The measurement is based on the magnetic properties of oxygen. The sensor measures the
sound pressure generated in the air gap of the magnet at the 164 Hz operating frequency. Two
microphones are used for detection and the Oxygen concentration is calculated from the RMS
value of the difference of the microphone outputs. The measurement principle is described in
more detail in section ”1.2.2. O2 measurement”.
The sensor consists of the following functional parts
• Pneumatic system
• Amplifier board
• MiniOM board
• Magnet
The sensor is shown in the picture below.
Figure 11 MiniOM oxygen sensor

NOTE: The sensor is assembled in the module using flexible suspension to prevent the
mechanical vibrations of the gas pump and cooling fan from disturbing the Oxygen
measurement. All gas lines to the sensor must also be carefully assembled so that they do not
pick up mechanical vibrations of the module mechanics.
Pneumatic System
The pneumatic system, together with the gas sampling system of the module creates the gas
flows and pressures needed for the oxygen measurement and protection of the microphones
from excessive pressure. About 30 ml/min flow of sampled gas comes to the In connector on
9-9

the MiniOM sensor. Room air is drawn to the Ref input of MiniOM also at 30 ml/min rate. About
75% of these flows are conducted to a pressure equalization chamber so that only about a 8
ml/min flow of the two gas streams continue into the air gap of the magnet. All the internal gas
flows finally get to a volume enclosed by the sensor board and the sensor body, and then flow
out through the Out connection of the sensor. Some of the gas channels and flow restrictors
are integrated into the preamplifier electronics board utilizing the multi-layer structure of the
LTCC (Low Temperature Co-fired Ceramics) circuit board technology.
NOTE: It is very important to prevent dust or liquids from getting into the pneumatic circuit of
MiniOM and thus, the gas connections should always be closed with a protecting cap when the
sensor is not connected to the module pneumatics.
Amplifier Board
The amplifier board located in the sensor has two electric microphones for the differential
detection of pressure pulses generated in the magnet's air gap. The microphone signals are fed
to two identical signal conditioning channels with a band-pass filter and a digitally controlled
amplifier. The voltage gains of the amplifiers are set during factory calibration so that the
responses of the microphone channels match in spite of differences in microphone's
sensitivities. The amplifier board also has an amplifier for the thermistor measuring the
temperature of the magnet.
MiniOM Board
The MiniOM board has five functions
• Drive the magnet coil.
• Convert the microphone and temperature signals into digital format.
• Filter digitally the microphone signals and perform the RMS-conversion.
• Communicate digitally with the module CPU.
• Store factory calibration data in permanent memory and communicate them to the
module CPU.
The module CPU provides the coil drive and communication enabling signals and also clock
signal for MiniOM board. The FPGA takes care of the coil drive and has also back-up clock in
case of CPU clock does not work. The FPGA takes care of the A/Dconversions which are
performed with a serial controlled SAR A/D-converter.
The digital band pass filtering and RMS conversion of the microphone signals is made with
FPGA circuit controlled by the VHDL code stored in the circuit. In order to filter out the
disturbances caused by acoustic noise, mechanical vibration and amplifier noise, the band
pass filters are designed to have as narrow a pass band as possible without slowing down the
filter's response to changes in the amplitude of the 164 Hz signal.
The FPGA circuit takes care of the digital communication between the miniOM sensor and the
module CPU.
The factory calibration coefficients of the sensor are stored in an EEPROM memory on the
miniOM board. When the module starts up, the calibration coefficients are read to the module
CPU and then used for calculating the O2 concentration from the Oxygen raw data received
from the sensor.
1.3.5 CPU board

The CPU board contains the processor, memories and an A/D-converter that is common to the
whole module.
9-10

Product overview
The CPU board also contains sensors for pressures, the temperature and humidity as well as
drivers for valves, the fan and the pump. The module is connected to the module bus through
an RS-485 serial channel.
+3.3 V
mOM +1.8 V
Connector DCDC
VCC_OM 11.5…18 V Module
Power
+7 V Bus
Supply
+5 V
mTPX Connector
Connector D25
ModBus_Data RS-485 RS-485
Transceiver
Analog to
Humidity and
Digital
Temperature
sensor
coversion
Zero Valve
Connector
4 Pressure
sensors CPU Atmel ETC Valve
Valve
AT91RM9200 Connector
Control
Memories Occlusion
SDRAM Valve
32 Mbyte Connector
NOR FLASH Pump Pump

8 Mbyte Control Connector
Fan Fan
Crystal Control Connector
16 MHz
User Button
Crystal Connector
32.678 KHz
Figure 12 Signal processing on CPU board
1.3.6 MiniOM board

The miniOmM board contains electronics specific to the MiniOM sensor: FPGA circuit, coil drive,
A/D-converter etc. It also contains EEPROM memory that stores calibration data of the oxygen
measurement.
1.3.7 Main Component Interactions

The figure below describes the functionality of the module and the division of tasks between
different components.
9-11

Figure 13 Block diagram
9-12


WARNING Only perform maintenance procedures specifically described in the manual.
WARNING Planned maintenance should be carried out annually. Failure to implement
the recommended maintenance schedule may cause equipment failure and
possible health hazards.
CAUTION Do not apply pressurized air to any outlet or tubing connected to the module.
NOTE: The manufacturer does not, in any manner, assume the responsibility for performing the
recommended maintenance schedule, unless an Equipment Maintenance Agreement exists.
The sole responsibility rests with the individuals, hospitals, or institutions utilizing the device.
Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure after any corrective

Performed service Visual inspections Functional check
activity (section 3.2) (section 3.3)
Front panel replacement All steps
OM Reference gas filter All steps Check “2. Sample Flow Rate Check”
assembly
Module case opened either All steps All steps
for troubleshooting purpose
or for replacing any of the
internal parts.
Planned maintenance
after installation:
1. 2.1. Replacement of planned maintenance parts
2. 2.2. Visual inspections
3. 2.3. Functional check
The instructions include a check form ("APPENDIX F") which should be filled in when performing
the procedures.
The symbol  in the instructions means that the check form should be signed after
performing the procedure.
9-13

2.1 Replacement of planned maintenance parts

2.1.1 Required parts
Replace the following parts that wear in use at the recommended interval.
Description Pieces Replacement interval

Nafion Tube, 230 mm (mainflow) 1 Once a year
Nafion tube, 85 mm (zero line) 1 Once every 4 years
OM Reference gas filter assembly including 1 Once a year
O-ring
PM sticker Once a year
CO2 absorber 1 Once every 4 years
It is also recommended to replace the D-fend Pro water trap, the gas sampling line as part of
the planned maintenance procedure.
accessories.
2.1.2 Planned Maintenance Kits

The required planned maintenance parts are included in a PM kit.
Part number Description

M1206554 Planned Maintenance Kit for E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO modules.
The PM kit includes the required Nafion tubes, the OM reference gas
filter assembly with an O-ring and a PM sticker.
NOTE: The PM kit does not include the CO2 absorber. Order it separately.
2.1.3 Replacement procedures

Replace the specified planned maintenance parts according to the chapter "Disassembly and
reassembly" on page 9-31.
1. Replace the CO2 absorber every 4 years.
2. Replace the special tubes (Nafion) and check the condition of the internal tubing.
• Check that the tubing inside the module is not contaminated. Any contamination
inside the tubing may indicate that the valves or sensors are contaminated, too. This
can increase a risk of faulty operation in valves or sensors. The valves or gas sensors
9-14

are not possible to clean in the field. Therefore, if you noticed any contamination in
the module tubing, send the module to GE Healthcare for factory service.
NOTE: The nafion tubes do not include the silicon fittings they connect to. Use the original
silicon fittings unless they are damaged or leaking.
3. Replace the OM reference gas filter assembly.
4. Check that the fan and ventilation hole are not covered in dust.

• all connectors are intact and are attached properly
• the D-fend Pro and its connectors are clean and intact
cleaning solutions for the monitor are described in the B40i monitor user’s manual. For details
about cleaning, disinfecting and sterilizing the accessories, see the instructions for use in the
accessory package.
9-15

2.3 Functional check

Turn on the monitor. Wait until the normal monitoring screen appears.
2.3.1 Test setup

Required tools
− A barometer
− A mass flowmeter for measuring air flow, minimum measurement range from 0 to 200
ml/min, accuracy 5% or better in the 0 to 200 ml/min range.
− P/N: 755583-HEL Calibration gas, CO2, O2, N2O, DESF, package of 1 can (with E-sCAiO,
N-CAiO modules)
− P/N: 755581-HEL QUICK CAL calibration gas, CO2, O2, N2O, package of 4 cans (with E-sCO
module)
− P/N: M1006864, Calibration Gas Regulator, US only
− P/N: 755571-HEL, Calibration Gas, 5% CO2, 54.5% O2, 36.0% N2O, 2.0% DESFLURANE, BAL
N2 (with E-sCAiO, N-CAiO modules) US only
− P/N: 755587, Calibration Gas, CO2, O2, Balance, 4 cans/pkg (with E-sCO module) US only
− D-fend Pro water trap
− 3 m / 10 ft anesthesia gas sampling line
− Adult D-Lite sensor
− A pressure manometer with either an integrated or a separate pressure pump
− Forceps
accessories.
Connections
• Disconnect the module from the monitor, if connected.
• Configure the CO2, O2, AA, and Flow waveform fields to the monitor screen with adequate
priority.
2.3.2 Procedure
Mark each task as complete on the checkout form.
1. Gas Sampling System Leak Test
NOTE: The gas module shall be disconnected from the monitor during the leak test.
Check the gas sampling system for possible leakages.
• Disconnect the module from the monitor.
• Detach the module front cover and casing.
• Block the OM reference tube with the forceps. Correct positioning of the forceps is
indicated by the figure below.
NOTE: Be careful when attaching the pincers to the tube and avoid stretching the
tube. Short pieces of silicone tubing on the forcep jaws can be used to protect the
tube from breaks that may appear when the tube is compressed between the jaws.
9-16

• Connect a new D-fend Pro water trap to the module.

• Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to a pressure manometer and a
pressure pump.
• Block the sample gas out (gas exhaust) connector.
• Pump 80 mmHg ± 20 mmHg pressure to the gas sampling system. Let the pressure
stabilize for approximately 10 - 20 seconds.
• Check that the pressure reading does not drop more than 2 mmHg during 25
seconds.
• Release the forceps, and reassemble the module. Make sure that the tubing fits
nicely into the module casing.

2. Sample Flow Rate Check
Check the sample flow rate. Connect the module to the monitor.
NOTE: Gas measurement is not available during the first 1 to 5 minutes after the module
is connected due to warming up. A message 'Calibrating Gas Sensor' is shown in the
waveform field. Wait until warm-up is completed before proceeding with the next steps.
NOTE: The ambient temperature and air pressure influence the flow rate measured by the
flow meter. A flow meter, which has been calibrated at 21.11 °C (70 °F) and 760 mmHg
(1033 cmH2O), measures the flow rate correctly under the same conditions, i.e. in room
temperature at sea level. A flow rate correction as instructed by the manufacturer of the
flow meter needs to be performed when measuring flow rate under other conditions, for
example in high altitude.
• Connect the gas sampling line (3 m / 10 ft with E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO) to the
sampling line connector.
• Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to a flowmeter.
• Check the sample flow rate reading from the flowmeter. The flow rate shall be within
the specification limit 120 ± 20 ml/min.
NOTE: Readjustment is needed, if the measured value is not within the specification limit.
Adjust the sample gas flow rate according to the instructions in section “3.1.2. Sample
Flow Rate Adjustment”.
9-17


3. Reference Gas Flow Rate Check
Check the flow rate in reference gas inlet:
• Connect the module to the monitor.
• Leave the other end of the gas sampling line open to room air.
• Connect the flowmeter to the OM reference gas inlet on the side of the module with
a piece of tubing.
• Check that the Reference Flow is within the following range:
10 - 50 ml/min with E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO modules
• Detach the water trap.
• Attach the front cover.

4. Fan
• Check that the gas module's fan is running behind the D-fend Pro water trap.
• Attach the water trap

5. Zero Valve Operation
Test the zero valve functionality:
• Connect the gas regulator to the calibration gas container.
• Connect the end of the gas sampling line to the regulator on the gas container.
• Enter to gas service menu: select Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) >
Service (26-23-8) > Parameters > Gas Unit > Gases.
• Start feeding the specified calibration gas. Wait until the gas values shown in the
Gas calibration menu rise approximately to the level indicated in the labelling of the
calibration gas container.
NOTE: The gas values in the gas service menu is in percentages (%).
• Open the zero valve to room air by selecting Zero valve ctrl.
• Check that the CO2, N2O and anesthesia agent values drop back near 0% and the
O2 reading near 21% (room air).
• Stop feeding the calibration gas.
• Turn the zero valve back to the normal measurement position by selecting ZERO to
MEAS. (measurement position).

6. Gas Calibration
Perform gas calibration according to the instructions in section “3.2. Gas Calibration”.
9-18


7. Agent Identification
NOTE: Perform this test only for E-sCAiO and N-CAiO modules.
Check agent ID unreliability:
• Feed the specified calibration gas for at least 30 seconds.
• Check that the anesthesia agent is identified as Desflurane and the ID unrel. value
(=agent ID unreliability) shown in the gas service menu is lower than 75.
If the value is higher, repeat the gas calibration and check the value again.

8. Ambient Pressure
Use a barometer to check the operation of the absolute pressure sensor.
• Check that the ambient pressure value shown in the gas service menu does not
differ more than ± 13.33 mbar from the value shown by the barometer.
NOTE: The ambient pressure value in the gas service menu is in mmHg.

• Block the tip of the sampling line by your finger.
• Check that a 'Sample line blocked' and ‘Low gas sample flow’ message appears on
the screen within 30 seconds.

10. Air Leak detection
• Detach the D-fend Pro water trap.
• Check that the message 'Check D-Fend' appears on the screen within 30 seconds.
• Attach the water trap.

11. Gas exhaust blockage
• Block the gas exhaust connector with your finger.
• Check that the message 'Check sample gas out' appears on the screen within 30
seconds.

12. Airway Gases
• Breathe a minimum of 5 times to the tip of the sampling line.
• Check that a normal CO2 waveform appears to the waveform field and the EtCO2
and FiCO2 values are updated on the screen.
9-19


13. Apnea detection
• Stop breathing to the gas sampling line.
• Check that an 'Apnea' alarm appears to the message field within 30 seconds.

• Select Discharge patient to discard any changes made to the monitor configuration
during checkout.
• Disconnect and reconnect the module before starting a new case.
• Fill in all necessary documents.
9-20

3 Calibration and adjustments

3.1 Sample Flow Rate Adjustment
Sample flow rate shall be adjusted:
• if the sample flow rate check in section “2.3.2. Procedure” failed.

Required tools
− A mass flowmeter for measuring air flow, minimum measurement range 0 to 200 ml/min,
accuracy 5% or better in the 0 to 200 ml/min range.
− 3 m / 10 ft anesthesia gas sampling line.
accessories.
NOTE: Use only accurate, properly maintained, calibrated and traceable calibration tools for
the parameter calibration to ensure measurement accuracy.
NOTE: If the flow meter unit is not ml/min, it shall be converted to ml/min according to the
instructions of the flow meter manufacturer.
NOTE: Gas module sample flow rate is calibrated in the factory to ambient air conditions
corresponding the flow at the end of 3 m sampling line. Make sure that your meter is also
showing the flow at ambient conditions (= ATP).
NOTE: Refer to the flowmeter documentation for user instructions.
Connections
2. Ensure that you have a new D-fend Pro water trap in use.
4. Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to the flow meter.
NOTE: Before checking or adjusting the sample flow, make sure there is no leakage in the
sampling system.
3.1.2 Sample Flow Rate Adjustment

1. Enter to gas service menu: select Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16-4-34) > Service
(26-23-8) > Parameters > Gas Unit > Gases.
2. Select Sample gain adj
3. Adjust the sample flow to the nominal value 120 ml/min by increasing or decreasing
Sample Flow Gain:
• To decrease the sample flow rate measured by the flow meter by approximately 7.5
ml/min, add gain value by 0.05.
• To increase the sample flow rate measured by the flow meter by approximately 7.5
ml/min, lower the gain value by 0.05.
4. Press Trim Knob to confirm the gain adjustment. Wait until the sample flow value shown
on screen returns near to the nominal value 120 ml/min and then check the actual
measured flow rate from the flow meter.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the flow meter shows a 120 ± 20 ml /min flow rate.
9-21

NOTE: Adjust the flow rate according to the reading in the flow meter. The flow rate reading in
the Gases menu is measured by the internal electronics and settles always back to the nominal
120 ml /min independent on the real flow rate.
3.2 Gas Calibration

WARNING Failure in zeroing or calibrating gases might cause inaccurate readings.
WARNING Since calibration gas contains anesthetic agents, always ensure sufficient
ventilation of the room during calibration.
Gas calibration shall be performed:
• each time planned maintenance is performed.
• each time corrective maintenance is performed.
NOTE: Gas calibration is a normal user action. Refer to the B40i monitor user’s manual for the
recommendation for gas calibration interval in clinical use.

Required tools
− P/N: 755583-HEL Calibration gas, CO2, O2, N2O, DESF, package of 1 can (with E-sCAiO and
N-CAiO modules)
− P/N: 755581-HEL QUICK CAL calibration gas, CO2, O2, N2O, package of 4 cans (with E-sCO
module)
− P/N: M1006864, Calibration Gas Regulator, US only
− P/N: 755571-HEL, Calibration Gas, 5% CO2, 54.5% O2, 36.0% N2O, 2.0% DESFLURANE, BAL
N2 (with E-sCAiO and N-CAiO modules) US only
− P/N: 755587, Calibration Gas, CO2, O2, Balance, 4 cans/pkg (with E-sCO module) US only
− 3 m / 10 ft anesthesia gas sampling line
NOTE: Use only the specified GE Healthcare calibration gas for the gas calibration to ensure
measurement accuracy. Do not use any other calibration gases. Check the calibration gas
container's labelling to ensure that the calibration gas has not expired.
NOTE: Ensure that the gas regulator is functioning properly before gas calibration. Refer to the
gas regulator's "Instructions for Use" letter for the annual maintenance instructions.
Connections
2. Ensure that you have a new D-fend Pro water trap in use.
3. Connect the gas regulator to the calibration gas container.
5. Connect the other end of the gas sampling line to the regulator on the gas container.
9-22

Figure 14 Connecting a gas regulator to the calibration gas container and

connecting a sampling line to the gas regulator.
3.2.2 Procedure
NOTE: Gas calibration is not available during the first 5 minutes after the module is connected.
For maximum accuracy, let the monitor to warm up for 30 minutes before starting calibration.
NOTE: Gas calibration is not available during a 'Sample line blocked', 'Check D-Fend' and
'Check sample gas out’ alarm condition. Resolve the alarm condition before starting
calibration.
1. Enter to gas calibration menu: Airway Gas > Gas Calibration
2. The monitor will start automatic zeroing of the gas sensors. Wait until the message
'Zeroing' is replaced by a message 'Zero Ok' for all measured gases.
3. Open the regulator after a message 'Feed gas' is shown for all measured gases. The
measured gas concentrations are shown in real-time in the gas calibration menu.
Continue feeding the calibration gas until the measured gas concentrations are stabilized
and a message 'Adjust' is shown for all measured gases. Close the regulator.
4. Use the Trim Knob to adjust the gas readings shown in the Calibration menu to match
with the gas readings in the labelling of the calibration gas container. Press Trim Knob to
accept the adjusted values when the gas readings match each other.
5. Wait until a message 'Ok' is shown for all measured gases.
NOTE: A message 'Zero Error' is shown in case the zeroing fails.
NOTE: A message 'Calibration Error' is shown, if you do not start feeding gas within 1 minute
after the automatic zeroing is completed, or if the calibration fails due to too large gain
adjustment.
NOTE: If zeroing or calibration failed, select the Recalibrate to restart the calibration procedure
from the beginning.
9-23

4 Troubleshooting
This chapter focuses on troubleshooting technical problems. Refer also to the troubleshooting
hints on the “User’s Guide” for troubleshooting monitoring problems, performance issues and
clinical configuration issues.

that:
• the water trap connection and disconnection functions properly
• all connectors are intact, clean and are attached properly
• the metal D-fend Pro connectors are clean and intact
known good ones.
module box by removing the four screws from the back of the module and check that:
9-24

Troubleshooting
4.2 Troubleshooting checklist

The following simple troubleshooting hints may help you to localize and isolate a functional
problem to the correct unit. Ensure that the monitor is turned on and the module is connected.
4.2.1 Gas sampling system troubleshooting

• Faults which can occur in the sampling system are: leaks or blockages in the tubing,
failure of the sampling pump or the magnetic valves, or diminishing of the flow rates
because of dirt or other matter accumulating in the internal tubing or failure of pressure
sensors.
• Whenever suspecting the sampling system and always after having done any work on
the sampling system, check the sampling system for leakages and check the flow rate.
• The D-fend Pro water trap should be replaced, when the 'Replace D-Fend' message
appears.
• If any liquid has entered the MiniTPX measuring unit due to water trap filter failure,
contact GE Healthcare service.
• Check that the tubing inside the module is not contaminated.
Any contamination inside the tubing may indicate that the valves or sensors are
contaminated, too. This can increase a risk of faulty operation in valves or sensors. The
valves or gas sensors are not possible to clean in the field. Therefore, if you noticed any
contamination in the module tubing, send the module to GE Healthcare for factory
service.
NOTE: All internal tubes are mechanically fragile. Sharp bends may cause leaks and occlusions.
4.2.2 MiniOM Measuring unit troubleshooting

• Due to the complicated and sensitive mechanical construction of the oxygen measuring
unit, no repairs should be attempted inside the unit. Instead, if the fault has been found in
the measuring unit itself, the entire module should be replaced and the faulty module be
sent to GE Healthcare for repair.
• In cases of no response to O2 or strong drift, check the tubing for loose connections,
blockages, and leaks.
• Check also the OM reference gas filter assembly, and replace if needed.
• If the O2 signal is noisy, check the measurement unit suspension and if the MiniOM tubing
has tension.
NOTE: Never apply overpressure to the O2 measuring unit, as the pressure transducer may be
permanently damaged.
4.2.3 MiniTPX Measuring unit troubleshooting

• The MiniTPX measuring unit can only be repaired at the factory. In case of failure, the
entire module should be replaced and the faulty module be sent to GE Healthcare for
repair.
4.2.4 CPU board troubleshooting

• Due to the complexity of the large scale integrated circuitry, there are few faults in the
CPU digital electronics that can be located without special equipment.
9-25

• Check that all connectors and screws are properly installed.

• In case of failure, the entire module should be replaced and the faulty module be sent to
GE Healthcare for repair.
4.3 Service Interface

The monitor has a service menu, which is a useful tool to examine monitor functions and
troubleshoot it in case a fault occurs.
To enter to the service menu see Chapter 5.
9-26

Troubleshooting
4.4 Messages
4.4.1 Gas measurement
Message Possible causes Possible solutions
Check D-Fend Water trap is not connected. Connect the water trap and sampling
Check D-Fend and line to the module.
sample gas out. Wait for Air leak inside the internal tubing. Check the internal tubing for leakages.
30 sec and press Normal Replace, if needed.
screen to continue.
Sample line blocked Gas sampling line is blocked. Check the external gas sampling line for
Continuous blockage. blockages. Replace, if needed.
Check sampling line Water trap container is full. Empty the water trap container.
and D-Fend. Water trap is occluded. Replace the water trap.
Internal tubing is blocked. Check the internal tubing for blockages.
Replace, if needed.
Check sampling gas out The sample gas outflow is blocked. Check the sample gas out connector in
Check D-Fend and the front panel and the exhaust line for
gas return or scavenging for blockages.
sample gas out. Wait for
30 sec and press Normal - If the sample gas is returned to the
patient circuit, check that there is no
screen to continue.
occlusion in the tubing.
- If the sample gas outlet is connected
to a scavenging system, make sure
an open system is used where gas is
removed in room pressure.
Check the internal tubing for blockages.
Internal tubing is blocked.
Check sample pump operation by
Pump failure.
measuring the sample gas flow rate.
Replace pump, if needed.
Replace D-Fend Defective or contaminated D-fend Pro. Replace the D-fend Pro water trap.
Occlusion in internal tubing. Check sample and reference flows.
Perform a visual check for the internal
tubing. Remove the cause for occlusion.
Calibrating Gas calibration is in progress. Wait until the calibration is completed
successfully.
Failure in Agent ID Agent ID has failed. Perform gas calibration. Check agent ID
unreliability (see functional check). If it
does not help, send the module to GE
Healthcare for factory repair.
Zeroing Zeroing is in progress. Wait until zeroing is completed
successfully.
9-27


Zero error Autozeroing during the measurement or Check the zero valve operation. Replace
in the beginning of the gas calibration the zero absorber and Nafion tube in
failed.
zero line. If it does not help, send the
module to GE Healthcare for factory
repair.
Calibrating error Feeding the calibration gas was not Recalibrate.
started within 1 minute after the
automatic zeroing was completed.
Calibration was failed due to too large Recalibrate.
gain adjustment.
Wrong calibration gas is used. Use the specified calibration gas.
Over range Measured FiO2 >103% Perform gas calibration.
Apnea deactivated Apnea alarm start-up conditions are not Apnea alarm detection is activated after
reached. the 3 breaths are detected.
Sensor INOP IR Lamp failure. Check miniTPX flex cable connection.
Ambient pressure is too high or low. Check the ambient pressure from the
Gas Calibrations menu.
CPU failure. Replace CPU.
No response from the gas module, high Return the module to GE Healthcare for
temperature inside the module, or service.
EEPROM checksum failure.
Incompatible gas Incompatible gas module detected by Check the compatibility of the gas
module the monitor. module.
Gas measurements The module is disconnected. Reconnect the module.
removed
Identical gas modules The monitor detects gas measurement Remove excess modules providing gas
from two or more modules. measurement.
9-28

Troubleshooting

Sensor INOP MiniOM unit failure Check flex cable connection.
- temperature
- internal supply voltages
- other internal failure
MiniTPX unit failure
- temperature
- IR lamp failure
CPU failure
- pressure sensor failure
- a/d-converter system failure
Other failure
- Fan failure
- Pump failure
- Valve (Zero, Occlusion) failure Check that fan can rotate freely.
- Zeroing fails too many times Check fan, pump or valve wire
- CO2 reference signal differs too much connection.
from CO2 signal
Calibrating gas sensor O2, CO2 and N2O measurements are not Wait until the warm-up is completed.
available during the first minute after
the module is connected due to
warm-up. Anaesthesia agent
measurement is not available during the
first 5 minutes after the module is
connected due to warm-up.
Over Scale Incorrect waveform scale for the Change to the appropriate waveform
parameter. The waveform clipped scale. For detailed instructions refer to
because measured gas concentration the user’s manual.
exceeds the upper limit of the current
scale.
Low gas sample flow Sample flow deviates to less than 80% Check sample flow rate. Adjust, if
of the module specific nominal flow needed.
value.
Gas sampling line, gas output, water Check or replace the gas sampling line,
trap, or internal tubing is blocked. water trap, or internal tubing.
Pump failure. Replace the pump unit.
9-29

4.5 Troubleshooting charts

4.5.1 Gas measurement
Problem Possible clinical cause Possible technical What to do

cause
too low EtCO2 value - sudden decrease in - leak in sampling system - check all connections
circulation - calibration error - check calibration
- pulmonary embolism - high by-pass flow from
- hyperventilation ventilator
- very large dead-space
- large shunting
too high EtCO2 - hypoventilation - D-fend Pro contaminated - change D-fend Pro
- increased metabolism - calibration error - check calibration
waveform clipped - incorrect scaling - change scale
no response to - apnea - sampling line or water - check all connections
breathing - disconnection trap loose or blocked (air
leak)
- sample gas out blocked - check that outlet is
open
EtCO2 overscale - abnormally high EtCO2 - CO2 sensor contaminated - call service technician
>15% (>20%) Shown (permissive hypercapnia) - D-fend Pro malfunction - change D-fend Pro
until 32%,
specified range
0...15%
EtCO2>PaCO2 - unit is mmHg or kPa - Dry gas as default - change to Wet gas For
and EtCO2 is close to detailed instructions
arterial PCO2 refer to the user’s
manual.
9-30


WARNING Disconnect the module from any monitoring system before performing any
repair.
WARNING Always perform Gas Sampling System Leak Test after the module cover is
reassembled.
WARNING Always perform gas calibration after any planned or corrective
maintenance.
5.1.1 Serviceable parts

• CO2 Absorber
• D-fend Pro
• Nafion tubes
• Front chassis unit
• Pump
• OM reference filter
• Latch and spring
• Mechanical parts listed in chapter “6. Service parts”
5.1.2 Service limitations

The following parts are not serviceable:
• MiniOM Measuring unit
• MiniTPX measuring unit
NOTE: Due to the complicated and sensitive mechanical construction of the oxygen measuring
unit, no repairs should be attempted inside the unit. Instead, if the fault has been found in the
measuring unit itself, the entire module should be replaced and the faulty module be sent to
GE Healthcare for repair.
NOTE: The MiniTPX measuring unit can only be repaired and calibrated at the factory. In case of
failure, the entire module should be replaced and the faulty module be sent to GE Healthcare
for repair.

WARNING Protect module from electrostatic discharge.
9-31

semiconductors.
boxes.
5.1.4 Protection from dust

WARNING Module must be handled to prevent dust from entering the gas sampling
system.
The gas sampling system must be protected from dust entering the tubes, valves and other
components. In order to achieve this goal, the following measures must be taken:
• Have the D-fend Pro water trap always connected to the module.
• Clean and dust free working environment during all service procedures.
• Minimize the times with any open connections in the gas sampling system.
• Always close the open tube connections of the sampling system when not working on the
module.
• Remove the protective caps on the gas pump only immediately before assembling it to
the module.
• Take the CO2-absorber out from the plastic bag only immediately before assembling it to
the module.
• The clothing of the service person must be such that the dust risk is taken into account.

• Note the positions of any sampling tubes, wires or cables. Mark them if necessary to
ensure that they are reassembled correctly.
9-32

5.1.6 Required tools
- Torx T8 and T10 screwdrivers

- forceps
5.2 Disassembly and reassembly procedure

Disassembling the module (see the exploded view of the module in chapter “Service parts”:
Reassembling the module: reverse the order of the disassembly steps.
Check that:
NOTE: Make sure that the Nafion tubes are routed in such a way that they don’t come near the
fan, and there is no risk of the fan being obstructed by the tubes. An obstructed fan will result in
degraded ventilation inside the module, and a ‘Sensor inop’ message being displayed.
5.2.1 Disassembly workflow

Use this workflow diagram to find the simplest way to disassemble the required parts of the
module. Follow the arrows from the top down to the required part and disassemble the module
by following the steps in between.
E-sCO,E-sCAiO or N-CAiO module
D-Fend Front cover
Module casing
Nafion CO2 absorber OM holder Front chassis unit Latch
Main flow connector Pump
9-33

5.2.2 Detaching the Front Cover
1. Remove the D-fend Pro.

2. Release the two snaps on both sides of the module by using
a flat blade screwdriver.
3. Detach the front cover.
5.2.3 Detaching the Module Casing
1. Remove the two T10 screws mounting the D25 connector

shield.
2. Detach the connector shield.
3. Remove the two Pozidrive screws.
4. Push the latch and pull the module casing.

NOTE: When reassembling ensure that the module casing does
not damage the conductive sealings on the front chassis unit.
5.2.4 Replacement of Planned Maintenance Parts
1. Carefully remove the main flow nafion tube and every 4th
year the shorter zero line nafion tube.
NOTE: Remember the route of the tubes and reassemble
correctly.
NOTE: Make sure that the Nafion tubes are routed in such a way
that they don’t come near the fan, and there is no risk of the fan
being obstructed by the tubes. An obstructed fan will result in
degraded ventilation inside the module, and sensor inop
message being displayed.
NOTE: The nafion tubes do not include the silicon fittings they
are connected to. Use the original silicon fittings unless they are
not damaged or leaking.
9-34

2. Pull out the OM reference filter assembly with forceps.

3. Push the new filter assembly until it is on the same level with
the front chassis.
5.2.5 Replacement of CO2 Absorber
1. Lift the CO2 absorber from the slot.
2. Detach the tubes from the absorber.

3. Connect the tubes to a new CO2 absorber and place it to the
slot.
5.2.6 Detaching the Latch
1. Pull the latch from the front chassis.

NOTE: Remember to detach the front cover first.
2. Remove the spring by squeezing it.
9-35

5.2.7 Detaching the Front Chassis Unit
1. Remove the two T10 screws.
2. Carefully detach the three tubes.
3. Disconnect the fan cable.

4. Detach the front chassis unit.
5.2.8 Detaching the Main Flow Connector

Original Main Flow Connector is required to maintain proper gas flow restriction in the module.
When the Front Chassis Unit is replaced move the original connector to the new unit.
9-36

1. Carefully detach the lock pin holding the main flow

connector.
2. Carefully attach the main flow connector to the new front

chassis unit.
5.2.9 Detaching the Pump
1. Carefully detach the tube from the pump.

2. Disconnect the pump cable from the CPU board.
3. Lift the pump from the metal brackets.
9-37

5.2.10 Detaching the OM holder
1. Carefully detach the three tubes from the OM unit.
2. Carefully disconnect the OM flex cable from the CPU board.

3. Carefully pass the flex cable through metal frame.
4. Lift the OM unit with the holder from the metal brackets.
5. Detach the holder.
9-38

Service parts
6 Service parts
6.1 Ordering parts
6.1.1 Planned Maintenance Kits

The required planned maintenance parts are included in a PM kit.
Part number Description

M1206554 Planned Maintenance Kit for E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO modules. The PM
kit includes the required Nafion tubes, OM reference filter assembly with
O-ring and PM Sticker.
NOTE: The PM kit does not include the CO2 absorber. Order it separately.
6.2 Spare parts for E-sCAiO, E-sCO, N-CAiO
9-39


1 FRU, Front Chassis Unit, E-sCAiO, E-sCO, N-CAiO M1206530
- Front Chassis Assembly
3 FRU, HW Kit, E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO M1206533
- All Mounting Screws
- All Conductive Sealings
- Pump Connector Silicone Tube
- D25 Connector Shield
- Latch
- Torsion Spring

4 FRU, Pump Unit, E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO M1206290
5 FRU, OM Holder, E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO M1206531
7 CO2 Absorber, E-sCO, E-sCAiO, N-CAiO M1206555
9-40

Service parts
6.2.1 Front covers

8 FRU, Front Cover, E-sCAiO M1206538
8 FRU, Front Cover, US, E-sCAiO M1206558
8 FRU, Front Cover, E-sCO M1206539
8 FRU, Front Cover, US, E-sCO M1206559
8 FRU, Front Cover, N-CAiO 2074385-001
8 FRU, Front Cover, US, N-CAiO 2074386-001
9-41

9-42

10 E-Entropy Module
Product overview
1 Product overview
1.1 Introduction
This document provides information for the maintenance and service of the Entropy Module,
E-ENTROPY. The Entropy module uses an electroencephalography (EEG) signal, together with
spontaneous facial muscular activity with a frontal electromyography (FEMG) signal to
measure:
• Response Entropy (RE)
• State Entropy (SE)
• Burst Suppression Ratio (BSR)
The Entropy module is responsible for EEG and FEMG signal acquisition, amplification, filtering
and digitization, and electrode impedance measurement. All the calculated parameters can be
selected on the display and trended.
Figure 1 Measurement setup

(1) Entropy module
(2) Entropy sensor cable
(3) GE Entropy sensor
(4) Entropy sensor

Entropy is a measure of irregularity in any signal. During general anesthesia, EEG changes
from irregular to more regular patterns when anesthesia deepens. Similarly, FEMG quiets down
as the deeper parts of the brain are increasingly saturated with anesthetics. The Entropy
Module measures these changes by quantifying the irregularity of EEG and FEMG signals.
Entropy parameters and BSR are calculated from EEG and FEMG signals acquired with a
sensor which is attached to the patient's forehead. The sensor consists of three electrodes. This
referential measurement yields one channel of raw EntrEEG.
10-1

Figure 2 A general view of the cable connections
1.2.1 EntrEEG
EEG is a differential voltage signal measured from electrodes attached to the patient’s skin.
EEG measures the spontaneous electrical activity of the brain. This electrical activity reflects
the state of the brain. In referential measurement, the referential electrode delivers its potential
to every channel’s minus-input. The signal is the potential difference between this common
reference electrode (electrode #3) and the electrode connected to the plus input (electrode #1).
The purpose of the ground electrode (electrode #2) is to reduce common mode noise.
The EntrEEG signal is amplified, antialias filtered, digitized and software filtered. After that, the
EntrEEG signal is shown on the screen and the RE, SE and BSR characteristics are calculated
from it.
1.2.2 FEMG
FEMG is an electrical signal originating from facial muscles. The FEMG signal has much broader
spectrum than EEG and it overlaps with EEG at low frequencies. The FEMG signal gives its
contribution to the RE values (see “RE and SE”). Mains power frequency and its harmonics are
digitally filtered away to reject interference noise from power lines.
1.2.3 RE and SE
Entropy numbers range from 100 to zero (RE 0-100, SE 0 – 91), correlating to the patient's
anesthetic state. High values of Entropy indicate high irregularity of the signal, signifying that
the patient is awake. There are two Entropy parameters: the fast-reacting Response Entropy
and the more steady and robust State Entropy. State Entropy consists of the entropy of EEG
signal calculated up to 32 Hz. Response Entropy includes additional high frequencies up to 47
Hz and, consequently, the fast frontalis EMG (FEMG) signals enable a fast response time.
Table 1 Frequency ranges for Entropy calculation
Response Entropy, RE 0 < f < 47 Hz

State Entropy, SE 0 < f < 32 Hz
10-2

Product overview
1.2.4 Impedance measurement

The impedance measurement is performed for all leads at the same time and the EntrEEG is
stopped for no longer than 5 seconds during the impedance measurement.
Differences in the electrode impedance of the electrodes cause common mode noise coupling
to the measured signal. To minimize this, the electrode impedance is measured and a warning
of an unsatisfactory impedance level is generated when necessary. The impedance of an
electrode is measured by applying a known current through the electrode and measuring the
voltage drop over the electrode. This way the impedance of a single electrode can be resolved.
1.3 Main components

1.3.1 Controls and connectors
Figure 3 Front panel of Entropy Module, E-ENTROPY, and the back of the
module
Module key Module Description

Entropy E-Entropy Opens the Entropy menu on
the screen
Check Sensor E-Entropy Starts the manual sensor check
Connector Module Description
Entropy E-Entropy Entropy connector
D25 connector E-Entropy Module bus connector
10-3

1.3.2 Entropy board

The Entropy board consists of the following functional sections:
• Microprocessor for measurement control, and for processing the measurement signal
• Digital I/O circuit for smart chip communication (the chip is located in the entropy sensor)
• Serial communication driver for module bus communication
The serial bus speed to the monitor is 500 kbps and the bus itself is half duplex, i.e. data can be
transferred to both directions but only one way at a time.
A/D Converter
IMC Connector Board

Amplification
Patient Isolation
Filtering
Module Bus
&
Figure 4 Entropy measurement system block diagram
10-4


Service personnel shall perform the following checkout procedure after any corrective

Performed service activity Visual inspections Electrical safety test Functional check
(section 3.1) (section 3.2) (section 3.3)
Module casing opened All steps All steps All steps
either for troubleshooting
purpose or for replacing
any of the internal parts.
Front cover, or an other All steps Not applicable Not applicable
external part, replaced.
Planned maintenance
after installation:
1. Visual inspections
2. Electrical safety tests
3. Functional check

• all connectors are intact and attached properly
cleaning, disinfecting and sterilizing of the accessories, see the instructions for use in the
accessory package.
10-5

2.2 Electrical safety tests

Complete the Electrical safety tests found in the “Electrical Safety Tests”, chapter 3. Perform
Patient leakage current tests, Patient (source) leakage current test and Patient (sink) leakage
current test.
Record the values of the tests on the "Service check form, E-Entropy" on page G-1.

2.3 Functional check
Turn the monitor on. Wait until the normal monitoring screen appears.
2.3.1 Test setup

Required tools
− P/N: N-ES, Simulator for E-ENTROPY
− Entropy sensor cable
accessories.
Connections
• Ensure that the module is connected to the monitor.
1. Configure the Entropy waveform field to the monitor screen with adequate priority.
2. Press the Entropy module key in the module to open the Entropy Setup menu and
configure:
Entr.EEG Scale: 250uV
Display format: RE+SE
Automatic sensor check: ON
2.3.2 Entropy tests

1. Module and sensor recognition
• Connect the Entropy sensor cable to the module.
• Check that the Entropy EEG waveform field and related information appears to the
screen.
• Check that a 'No sensor' message is shown in the Entropy parameter window.

2. Sensor checking
• Connect the Entropy simulator to the Entropy sensor cable.
• Check that a 'Checking sensor' message appears after a while and wait until all 3
electrodes are checked. The sensor check is passed, if a green circle with a check
mark changes to orange with result text (PASS/FAIL) for each tested electrode is
shown.
10-6


3. Functional check with a simulator
• Check that the EntrEEG waveform and RE & SE values appear on the monitor screen
approximately 30 seconds after the sensor check is completed.

• Fill in all necessary documents, refer to "Service check form, E-Entropy" on page G-1
10-7

3 Troubleshooting

that:
• all connectors are intact, clean, and attached properly
known good ones.
module box by removing the two screws from the back of the module and check that:
• screws are tightened properly
• cables are connected properly
• the EMC cover is attached properly in the module
• Press a module key. Check that the related menu is opened or activity is started.
Inoperatibility may refer to a loose keypad cable or other problem in the module.
10-8

Troubleshooting
3.2 Troubleshooting chart
Problem Possible causes Possible solutions

No EntEEG waveform or Entropy Entropy module is not connected. Connect the Entropy module to
parameter window on the screen. the monitor and the Entropy
sensor cable to the module.
Configure EntEEG waveform or

EntEEG waveform or Entropy
Entropy parameter to the screen,
parameter window is not configured to
or increase the priority of the
the screen, or the parameter priority is
parameter information.
set too low.
10-9



semiconductors.
boxes.

• Note the positions of any wires or cables. Mark them if necessary to ensure that they are
re-assembled correctly.
10-10

4.1.3 Required tools
- pincers
- torx screwdriver, T10
4.2 Disassembling and reassembling procedure

Disassembling the E-ENTROPY module (see the exploded view of the module in chapter “5.
Service parts”):
4.2.1 To replace the front cover

the front chassis unit by using a small flat blade screwdriver. There are 2 snaps on both
4.2.2 To replace the Entropy board

1. Remove the two screws (T10) from the back of the module.
2. While pressing the release latch, pull the module casing slowly backwards and remove it
from the main body.
3. Disconnect the front panel connector cable and the membrane keyboard cable from the
Entropy board.
4. Detach the front cover (see 4.2.1).
5. Detach the Entropy board by removing the two screws located near the front chassis unit.
Pull out the front chassis unit.
4.2.3 Reassembling the module

Reverse the order of the disassembly steps. Check that:
• screws are tightened properly
• cables are connected properly
10-11

5 Service parts
5.1 Ordering parts
5.2 Spare parts for E-ENTROPY

1 Module Casing, Single M1021035
2 SCREW, machine, M3x4mm, DIN7985, torx head, pan head, steel *
3 Entropy Board, E-ENTROPY M1093919
10-12

Service parts

4 SCREW, screw for plastic, x12mm, WN1452, torx head, pan head, steel, zinc, *
SCREW-PT, PAN-HEAD, TORX, 3.0x12mm, ST-ZN, WN1452
5 SCREW, screw for plastic, x8mm, WN1452, torx head, pan head, steel, zinc, *
SCREW-PT, PAN-HEAD, TORX, 3.0x8mm, ST-ZN, WN1452
6 IMC CONNECTOR BOARD, M-ENTROPY 8004791
7 Front Chassis Unit, E-ENTROPY M1024285
8 Membrane Keyboard M1012126
9 SCREW, machine, M3x8mm, DIN965, torx head, flat countersunk head, steel *
10 Metal frame 879184
11 Ferrite holder, M-ENTROPY, Investment cast M1002842
12 CONNECTOR CABLE, M-ENTROPY..01 8005305
13 Torsion Spring M1020935
14 Latch M1021039
15 Front Cover, EN, E-ENTROPY M1021097
15 Front Cover, CS, E-ENTROPY M1063322
15 Front Cover, DA, E-ENTROPY M1024882
15 Front Cover, ES, E-ENTROPY M1024939
15 Front Cover, FI, E-ENTROPY M1024941
15 Front Cover, FR, E-ENTROPY M1024942
15 Front Cover, HU, E-ENTROPY M1046108
15 Front Cover, IT, E-ENTROPY M1024943
15 Front Cover, JA, E-ENTROPY M1024944
15 Front Cover, NL, E-ENTROPY M1024945
15 Front Cover, NO, E-ENTROPY M1024946
15 Front Cover, PL, E-ENTROPY M1024947
15 Front Cover, PT, E-ENTROPY M1024948
15 Front Cover, SV, E-ENTROPY M1024949
15 Front Cover, DE, E-ENTROPY M1020825
*) Part is not available from GE. Source locally.
10-13

10-14

Software download instruction
APPENDIX A: Software download instruction

1.1 Overview
This chpater describes the procedure to install software to a B40i patient monitor.
The software installation process consists of 2 main phases:
1) Software Transfer. Software transfer takes place using the GE Healthcare Software Transfer
Utility that runs on a service PC. This application allows you to transfer new software from a
Software CD to the patient monitor(s) through the Network or a crossover cable. The
transferred new software will remain in an inactive state until the user activates it.
2) Software Activation. Software activation is enabled only when a patient monitor is in a
discharged state. You can perform it only on one patient monitor at a time.
NOTE: Don’t transfer the modes’ data among following software version families, any
incompatible transfer will make the current mode return to default settings.
− VSP-A all versions
− VSP-B_1.05 and earlier versions
− VSP-B_1.13 and later versions
1.2 Contents of the upgrade kit

The Software Download tool CD consists of the following:
• B40 Main software (vsp, b40.xml, vspversion)
• B40 Root file system (rootfs.img)
• B40 Language files (S5FLASH0.BIN, S5FLASH1.BIN, S5FLASH2.BIN)
• Service download tool (GE Healthcare Software Transfer Utility)
• B40 Software Installation Instruction
1.3 Connection methods

There are 2 different ways to connect a service PC to a patient monitor. Select a method that is
applicable to network infrastructure you have.
NOTE: Software transfer occurs only in the case that the download mode is enabled
and cannot be used to monitoring of a patient. Software activation is a separate
phase and it is enabled only when the patient monitor is in a discharged state.
NOTE: Before doing software transfer, please remove the multi I/O adpter from the
monitor if it have.
a. Network method
In this method, a service PC is connected to the patient monitor via Network.
This connection method allows you to transfer software to several patient monitors at a time.
b. Ethernet crossover cable method
In this method, a service PC is connected to the patient monitor’s Ethernet port with a
crossover cable
This method allows you to transfer software only to one patient monitor at a time.
A-1

1.4 Required equipment

Connection method to be used Required equipment
Network • Service PC running Microsoft®
Windows® NT™, 2000™, XP™ or
Win7 with an Ethernet network card
• Software CD
• Ethernet cable
Ethernet crossover cable • Service PC running Microsoft®
Windows® NT™, 2000™, XP™ or
Win7 with an Ethernet network card
• Software CD
• Ethernet crossover cable
1.5 Workflow
The following sections describe the sequential workflow for the software installation:
Sections 1.6 through 1.8 describe how to prepare the patient monitor(s) and the service PC for
the software installation.
Sections 1.9 through 1.11 describe the software transfer process using the GE Healthcare
Software Transfer Utility.
Sections 1.12 and 1.13 describe the software activation process and the functional check
procedure after activating the new software.
1.6 Prepare the connections

Connect a service PC to the network or directly to the patient monitor. Follow the appropriate
procedure below.
Refer to section 5 Connection methods for details.
Connection method to be used Procedure

Network • Connect a service PC to the
Network with an Ethernet cable.
Ethernet crossover cable • Connect a service PC to the
monitor’s Ethernet connector with a
crossover cable.
1.7 Prepare the patient monitor(s)

1. Turn the patient monitor(s) on and wait until the normal monitoring screen appears.
2. Before transferring any software, verify that patient is discharged from the monitor.
3. Record the language in “1.15. User settings record” according to the inforamtion in
service menu.
A-2

− Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16,4,34) > Service (26, 23, 8) > SW Management >
Country Settings > Languages > Language
4. Set the patient type to NEO
− Admit/Discharge > Admit Patient > Patient Type
5. Record the IBP1 settings in “1.15. User settings record”
− IBP > IBP1 ‘XXX’ Setup
6. Discharge the patient
− Admit/Discharge > Discharge
NOTE: Language configuration and in Neonatal mode IBP1 settings will be lost after installation
of new monitor software.
7. Configure the patient monitor(s) for the software installation. Follow the appropriate
procedure below.
NOTE: When the patient monitor is in the download mode, the patient monitor will stop
communicating with central station(s) and all the parameter modules will be powered off.
NOTE: If replace the CPU board, which already has the run-in software baseline. The password
should be Install/Service (20), Service (20), skip step 3 to 6 of above process, other operations
are the same as normal upgrade.

Network 1. Verify that the patient monitor is
connected to a live network.
2. Determine if the Monitor’s Network
is configured to use static (manual)
configuration mode. (NOTE: You will
need to configure your service
laptop to operate in the same
network.)
3. Record the IP address:
IP address:___________________
Netmask:____________________
Default gateway: _____________.
Ethernet crossover cable 1. Verify that the monitor’s network is
configured in manual configuration
mode. If needed, configure the
network to operate with static IP
address.
2. Record the IP address:
Static IP:___________________
Netmask:__________________.
1.8 Prepare the service PC

Configure the service PC to communicate with the patient monitor.
NOTE: It’s recommended you to disable the firewall protection or networking services,
such as Cisco Systems VPN, BlackIce, Sophos, McAfee on the service PC before you use
Software Transfer Utility. Refer to Technical Bulletin DOC1397399 or contact IT support
engineer for details.
A-3


Network 1. Configure the service PC’s network
settings to communicate with the
patient monitor in the Network.
Refer to Windows documentation
on how to verify and change the IP
address of the service PC
If manual configuration mode is
used on the monitor, configure a
unique IP address and a valid
subnet mask. The service PC shall
be configured to operate in the
same subnet with the patient
monitor’s network. If default
gateway is in use in Network,
configure also the default gateway
address to the service PC.
2. Verify that the service PC is able to
perform a network ping to the
patient monitor.
Ethernet crossover cable 1. Configure the service PC’s network
settings to operate in a manual
configuration mode. Configure a
unique IP address and a valid
subnet mask. The service PC shall
be configured to operate in the
same subnet with the patient
monitor’s network.
2. Verify that the service PC is able to
perform a network ping to the
patient monitor.
1.9 Start the Software Transfer Utility

Insert the CD containing the software into the service PC’s CD-drive. The GE Healthcare
Software Transfer Utility window should launch automatically. If not, double-click the
MyComputer icon on the PC desktop, and double-click the “auto.bat” file in the CD directory.
NOTE: You can load the contents of CD to your PC to speed up the software
installation.
A-4

1.10 Specify the IP address(es) of the target patient

Monitor(s)
There are two methods to specify the IP addresses of the target patient monitors. You can
either enter the IP addresses manually (step 1 below) or import a text file that contains the IP
addresses (step 2 below).
1. To manually enter the IP addresses, complete the following steps:
a. Under Add Target IP Addresses, enter the IP address of a patient monitor where you
want to transfer the software.
b. Select the down arrow button to add this IP Address to the displayed list.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each additional patient monitor.
NOTE: To save the list of displayed IP addresses in a text file (.txt) format, select File ->
Export IP File. Specify the destination and file name of this .txt file.
2. To automatically upload a text file (.txt), complete the following steps:
a. Open Windows Notepad®.
b. Enter one IP address per line. To add a brief descriptor (e.g., PatientMonitor_1), enter a
<space> after the IP address and type the descriptor. See the following example:
A-5

c. Select File -> Save. Specify the destination and file name of this text file (.txt) so you can
easily navigate to it.
d. From the GE Healthcare Software Transfer Utility window, select File ->Import IP File.
Navigate to the .txt file containing the IP addresses. The IP addresses display in the Add
Target IP Addresses list.
3. Verify these IP address(es) are the destination(s) where you want to transfer the software.
NOTE: To remove an incorrect IP address from the displayed list, select the IP address
and click the up arrow button.
1.11 Transfer the software

Once the GE Healthcare Software Transfer Utility > Add Target IP Addresses list is populated
with the IP addresses of the target patient monitors, you are ready to transfer the software.
Complete the following procedure to transfer the selected software package:
1. Enable the software download mode from Service Menu.
Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16,4,34) > Service (26, 23, 8) > SW Management > SW
Download > Enable SW Download > YES
2. Under Select Software Packages, select the software package you want to transfer to the
monitor.
3. Select Transfer. Transfer status information displays in the Transfer Status window at
the bottom of the GE Healthcare Software Transfer Utility window.
NOTE: Software can only be transferred on a limited number of target monitors at a time. As a
result, the software transfer may occur in sequential groupings.
NOTE: To cancel a software transfer, select Cancel. Selecting Cancel only cancels the transfer
of the queued software package(s) identified in the Transfer Status window. Once a software
package transfer begins, you cannot cancel it.
A-6

4. Verify the transfer status of all selected software packages indicates Success in PC.
NOTE: If the transfer status show the Failed information, please do not activate the
software. You should redo the software download.
5. Select Exit.
Software Transfer to destination monitor(s) is now completed. The next step is to activate the
transferred software.
NOTE: Please do not restart the monitor manually. Activate the software first. The monitor will
automatically restart by activation.
1.12 Activate the software

NOTE: LOSS OF MONITORING — To activate software, the patient monitor must be in a
discharged state. Before activating any software, verify that patient is discharged
from the patient monitor.
NOTE: Monitor software activation will automatically restart the patient monitor as
part of the activation process.
NOTE: Contact GE Healthcare to get the latest version of the user and service
documentation.
1. Select Monitor Setup > Install/Service > Service > SW Management > Active Inactive
SW. The Soft active status displays.
2. Check that the software to be activated is listed in the Inactive software status.
3. Select Activation to activate the inactive software.
NOTE: After the first restart, if an “Memory Error” alarm message on screen, please ignore.
To restart the monitor again, this message can be disappeared.
A-7

1.13 Perform post software activation checkout

Verify that the software version you activated in the section “Activate the software” is now
active:
1. Check that the patient monitor starts up normally after the automatic restart initiated by
the software activation and no error messages appear on the screen.
2. Select Monitor Setup > Install/Service > Service.
3. Verify that the active software version is correct.
NOTE: For B40i, there is no need do any maintenance checkout after software
installation, because software is verified be engineering before release.
1.14 Configuration and setup

1.14.1 Language configuration
1. Press the Monitor Setup key, select Install/Service (16,4,34) > Service (26,23,8) > SW
Management > Country Settings, setup Languages according to record in “1.15. User
settings record”
2. Restart the monitor.
1.14.2 Network setup (if required)

Refer to 1.6.3. Network configuration in "Installation" Chapter.
NOTE: The network installation and service are allowed by authorized service personnel only.
1.14.3 User settings restore

− Manually setup IBP1 settings in Neonatal mode according to the record in “1.15. User
settings record”
1.15 User settings record

Monitor Setup > Install/Service (16,4,34) > Service (26,23,8)
SW Management > Country Settings
Languages
IBP > IBP1 ‘XXX’ Setup
Label
Scale
Digit format
Response
Filter Frequency
A-8

ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
APPENDIX B: ElectroMagnetic Compatibility

Table 1 Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic
emissions
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions

The monitor is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of the B40i should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions Group 1 The B40i uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore,
CISPR 11 its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The monitor is suitable for use in all establishments other than
CISPR 11 domestic establishments and those directly connected to the
public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
Hermonic emissions Class A
used for domestic purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/ Class A
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
B-1


immunity
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

The B40i is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of
the B40i should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment -
guidance
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or
discharge (ESD) ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8 kV air ±8 kV air synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of
transients/bursts supply lines supply lines a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-4 environment.
Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality should be that of
IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode a typical commercial or hospital
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality should be that of
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) a typical commercial or hospital
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle environment. If user of the equipment
power supply lines requires continued operation during
IEC 61000-4-11 40% UT 40% UT power mains interruptions, it is
(60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) recommended that the equipment be
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles powered from an uninterruptible
power supply or a battery.
70% UT 70% UT
(30% dip in UT) (30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
<5% UT <5% UT
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT)
for 5 sec for 5 sec
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic field
(50/60 Hz) magnetic should be at levels characteristic of a
field typical location in a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 commercial or hospital environment.
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
B-2

ElectroMagnetic Compatibility

immunity
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity

The B40i is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of
the B40i should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the equipment,
including cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms
3.5
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz ------ P
V1
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m 80 MHz to 800

3.5
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz ------ P
E1
7 800 MHz to 2.5

------ P
E1
where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey, a
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range. b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones
and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be
predicated theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF
transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which the equipment is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the
equipment should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed,
additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the equipment.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
B-3

Table 4 Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF

communications equipment and the B40i monitor
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF

communications equipment and the B40i.
The monitor is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the equipment can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the equipment as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter
150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
W
3.5 3.5 7
------ P ------ P ------ P
V1 E1 E1
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.17 1.17 2.33
10 3.69 3.69 7.38
100 11.67 11.67 23.33
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
B-4

Installation and checkout form, B40i
APPENDIX C: Installation and checkout form,

B40i
Customer
Service
Service engineer Date
Monitor license
MAC Address License key
Modules
Gas module: Entropy module:
OK = Test OK N.A. = Test not applicable Fail = Test failed
Visual Inspection OK N.A. Fail
3.1. Visual inspection
Electrical Safety Tests OK N.A. Fail
2.2. Power Outlet Test
2.3. Power cord and plug
2.4. Ground (earth) integrity
< 0.1 ohms/

Ground continuity test
< 0.2 ohms
< 0.1 ohms/
Impedance of protective earth connection
< 0.2 ohms
2.5. Earth leakage current test
< 500 µA/

Normal Condition (NC)
< 300 µA
Single Fault Condition (SFC) < 1 mA
C-1

2.6. Enclosure (Touch) leakage current test
Normal Condition (NC) < 100 µA/
< 500 µA/

Single Fault Condition (SFC)
< 300 µA
2.7.1. Patient (source) leakage current test
Normal Condition (NC) < 10 µA/
Single Fault Condition (SFC) < 50 µA/
2.7.2. Patient (sink) leakage current tests < 50 µA/
Notes
Functional Inspection OK N.A. Fail
3.2.1. Start-up
3.2.2. Display
3.2.3. Time and date
3.2.4. Parameters measurements
3.2.5. Recorder
3.2.6. MC or S/5 Network connection
3.2.7. Conclusion
3.2.7. Conclusion
Notes
Signature
C-2

Maintenance and checkout form, B40i
APPENDIX D: Maintenance and checkout form,

B40i
Customer
Service
Monitor Installation
IBP: SpO2 module: TEMP: Network:
Gas module: Entropy module:
Measuring equipment used:

Equipment / tool: Manufacturer: Model/Type/Part Serial Number / Calibration
Number: ID: Date:
4.1. Visual inspection
Notes
2.2. Power Outlet Test
2.3. Power cord and plug
2.4. Ground (earth) integrity
< 0.1 ohms/

Ground continuity test
< 0.2 ohms
< 0.1 ohms/
Impedance of protective earth connection
< 0.2 ohms
D-1

2.5. Earth leakage current test
< 500 µA
Normal Condition (NC)
< 300 µA
Single Fault Condition (SFC) < 1 mA
2.6. Enclosure (Touch) leakage current test
Normal Condition (NC) < 100 µA
< 500 µA
Single Fault Condition (SFC)
< 300 µA
Single Fault Condition (SFC) < 50 µA
2.7.2. Patient (sink) leakage current tests < 50 µA
Notes
4.2.1. Start-up
4.2.2. Display
4.2.3. Keyboard(s)
4.2.4. Time and date
Notes
4.2.5. Hemo Module
. ECG measurement
1. Normal Sinus Rhythm
2. Pacemaker Detection
3. Asystole Detection
4. Leads Off Detection
D-2

Maintenance and checkout form, B40i
Notes
. Respiration measurement
5. Respiration Rate
6. Apnea Detection
Notes
. Temperature measurement
7. Temperature detection
Notes
. Invasive blood pressure measurement
8. Zeroing
9. Static Pressure
10. Pressure Waveforms
Notes
. SpO2 measurement
11. Test measurement
Notes
. Non Invasive Blood Pressure measurement
12. NIBP Leak Test
13. NIBP calibration
14. NIBP hose detection
Notes
4.2.6. Loudspeaker
4.2.7. Monitor software
4.2.8. Watchdog circuitry
4.2.9. Network
D-3

4.2.10. Final cleaning
Notes
Monitor battery maintenance OK N.A. Fail
4.3.3. Test the battery charge
Notes
Used Spare Parts
Notes
Signature
D-4

Appendix E, Service check form, E-miniC
APPENDIX E Service check form, E-miniC

Customer Monitor S/N
Service Module type S/N
Measuring equipment / test gases used:

Equipment / tool / gas: Manufacturer: Model/Type/Part No: Serial Number/ID: Cal Due Date:
Prior to testing verify all equipment is calibrated via “Cal” labeling and record Cal Due Dates
2.2. Visual inspections
Notes
Functional checkout OK N.A. Fail
1. Gas sampling system leak test
2. Sample flow check
3. Zero valve operation
4. Gas calibration
5. Ambient pressure
7. Air leak detection
8. Airway gases
E-1

9. Apnea detection
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
E-2

Appendix F, Service check form, E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO
APPENDIX F Service check form, E-sCO, E-sCAiO

and N-CAiO

Notes
1. Gas Sampling System Leak Test
2. Sample Flow Rate Check
3. Reference Gas Flow Rate Check
4. Fan
5. Zero Valve Operation
6. Gas Calibration
7. Agent Identification
8. Ambient Pressure
F-1
10. Air Leak detection
11. Gas exhaust blockage
12. Airway Gases
13. Apnea detection
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
F-2

Appendix G, Service check form, E-Entropy
APPENDIX G Service check form, E-Entropy


Visual Inspection OK N.A. Fail OK N.A. Fail
Notes
Single Fault Condition (SFC) < 50 µA
2.7.2. Patient (sink) leakage current tests
using a test body < 10 µA
using a patient cable < 50 µA
Notes
G-1
Functional check OK N.A. Fail
1. Module and sensor recognition
2. Sensor checking
3. Functional check with a simulator
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
G-2

Appendix H, Networking disclosure to facilitate network risk managment
APPENDIX H Networking disclosure to facilitate

network risk managment
Purpose and scope
This disclosure is intended to satisfy the requirements of IEC 60601-1:2005 clause 14.13 and
IEC/ISO 80001-1:2010 clause 3.5 for disclosure of network related specifications, requirements
and residual risks in order to facilitate the responsible organization’s risk management
activities (e.g. pursuant to 80001-1) for their networks incorporating the B40i monitor.
Purpose for B40i monitor connection to network

• Providing realtime patient data (i.e. parameters, waveforms and alarms) to compatible
network devices such as central stations.
• Remote configuration (patient admission, alarm settings, etc.) from compatible network
devices.
• Printing to a compatible network printer.
Network interface technical specifications

Connection Name Mission Critical (MC) network port
Physical network connection type IEEE 802.3-1998 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Speeds and duplex modes supported 100 Mbps half and full duplex
Default IP address (from factory) IP address: 172.16.X.X
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Gateway: 172.16.254.254
IP addressing IPv4 static
Qos Support IP layer DSCP tagging
Connection Name S/5 network port

Physical network connection type IEEE 802.3-1998 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Speeds and duplex modes supported 100 Mbps half and full duplex
Address Virtual Plug ID
Network information flows
Flow Name Realtime patient data

Network connection on device MC network port, S/5 network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Waveforms, parameters, trends, alarm
settings, admit/discharge patient
Licensed/optional/required Licensed: Unity or S/5
H-1
Communication partner Device/IP MC: CIC, Aware Gateway, CARESCAPE

address/network Gateway, Mobile Care Server
S/5: iCentral
Middle layer protocols MC: UDP; S/5: DRI
Application layer protocol and encoding MC: Unity; S/5: DRI
Ports MC: 2000, 7000, 7001
Traffic characterization and bandwidth MC: 50 Kbps streaming data per patient
requirements view, 11 views maximum for wired network
S/5: Variable
Flow Name Ping

Network connection on device MC network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Network troubleshooting and check
Licensed/optional/required Required
Communication Partner Device/IP PC, other medical devices
address/network
Middle layer protocols ICMP
Application layer protocol and encoding NA
Ports NA
Traffic characterization and bandwidth On-demand, user initiated
requirements
Flow Name HL7

Usage Type/Function/Purpose HL7 outbound to EMR system
Licensed/optional/required Licensed
Communication Partner Device/IP HL7 Server
address/network
Middle layer protocols TCP
Application layer protocol and encoding HL7
Ports customer definded, default port is 6000
Traffic characterization and bandwidth 720 bps, on demand
requirements
Flow Name Printing

Network connection on device S/5 network port
Usage Type/Function/Purpose Print
H-2

Appendix H, Networking disclosure to facilitate network risk managment
Communication Partner Device/IP Printer
address/network
Middle layer protocols DRI
Application layer protocol and encoding PCL
Ports NA
Traffic characterization and bandwidth Max: 47 Kbps, Avg: 27 Kbps
requirements
Flow Name Software Transfer

Usage Type/Function/Purpose Performs software upgrades
Communication Partner Device/IP Service-PC
address/network
Middle layer protocols TCP
Application layer protocol and encoding HTTP
Ports 10001
Traffic characterization and bandwidth 10 Mbps
requirements
Required characteristics and configuration of network for support

• The network must meet the specific requirements above for all traffic flows associated
with the subset of features, use cases and workflows required by the responsible
organization’s users.
• In addition, the network must be “flat” (i.e. limited to a single IP broadcast domain).
Potential risks to safety, effectiveness or security resulting from failure of IT

network to provide the required
Loss of network connectivity can result in the following hazardous situations:
− Missed alarm at a remote viewing station (bedside or CIC).
− Complete or partial loss or deterioration of remote monitoring of waveform and
parameter data at remote viewing device.
Product mitigations:
− Low alarm volume is increased if network communication fails
− Audio off, audio pause are interrupted if network communication fails
− User is notified of network communication failure, message is displayed until user
acknowledges it
− User is notified if a duplicate IP address is detected
− User is notified if a duplicate unit/bed name
H-3
In addition to the hazardous situations identified above, connection of the B40i monitor to a
network that includes other equipment could result in other unidentified risks to patients,
operators or third parties. The responsible organization should identify, analyze, evaluate and
control these risks on an ongoing basis including after changes to the network, which could
introduce new risks and require additional analysis.
H-4

Headquarters Asian Headquarters
GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems
GE Healthcare Finland Oy Information Technologies, Inc. Information Technologies Asia
Kuortaneenkatu 2 8200 West Tower Avenue 1 Huatuo Road
FI-00510 Helsinki Milwaukee, WI 53223 USA Zhangjiang Hi-tech Park Pudong
Finland Shanghai, P.R. China, 201203
Tel: + 1 414 355 5000
Tel: + 358 10 39411 Tel: + 86 21 3877 7888
1 800 558 5120 (US only) Fax: + 86 21 3877 7451
Fax: + 358 9 1463310 Fax: + 1 414 355 3790
www.gehealthcare.com
0537

B40i Technical Reference Manual Rev C

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationB40i datasheet

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

B40i Technical Reference Manual Rev C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B40i Technical Reference Manual Rev C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

B40i Patient Monitor

B40i Patient Monitor

Technical Reference Manual

All specifications subject to change without notice.

Order code 2069392-002

6 Field replaceable unit

2.3 Functional checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

9 E-sCO, E-sCAiO and N-CAiO Modules

Appendix A: Software download instruction A-1

Intended purpose of this device (Indications for use)

Notes to the reader

Responsibility of the manufacturer

Document no. 2069392-002

 Sign the check form after performing the procedure.

Illustrations and names

Document no. 2069392-002

1. B40i monitor frame

Document no. 2069392-002

Refer to instruction manual/booklet

Electrostatic sensitive device. Connections should not be made to

Type BF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock. Isolated

Type BF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric

Equipotentiality. Monitor can be connected to potential equalization

Document no. 2069392-002

Home. Return to the normal screen.

IP21 Degree of ingress protection.

Manufacturer. This symbol indicates the name and the address of

European Union Declaration of Conformity.

Prescriptive Device. USA only. For use by or on the order of a

Keep dry. Protect from rain.

This way up.

Atmospheric pressure limitations.

Document no. 2069392-002

Recycled materials or may be recycled.

This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic

The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its

Battery (A) charging (white bar)

Battery (A) failure

Both batteries failed

Battery (A) missing

Submenu. Selecting a menu item with this symbol opens a new

The monitor is connected to Network.

A lung next to the respiration rate value indicates that respiration

Document no. 2069392-002

Audio alarms paused indicator - Indicates all audio alarms are

1.2 Safety information

1.2.2 Safety message signal words

Document no. 2069392-002

1.2.3 Safety precautions

Document no. 2069392-002

1.2.4 ESD precautionary procedures

ESD precautionary procedure training

1.3 Service information

Document no. 2069392-002

1.3.2 Equipment identification

Serial number for B40i: SK3YYFW0000HA

Document no. 2069392-002